巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Ada: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [to ad, see adeti, cp. °ga, °ṭha, °da etc.] eating S.IV,195 (kiṭṭhâda eating corn); J.II,439 (vantâda = vantakhādaka C.). (Page 25)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adadi: {'def': '(dadāti 的【过】), Adā, (dadāti 的【过特】), 他给了。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(dadāti 的【过】), Adā, (dadāti 的【过特】), 他给了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adaka: {'def': '(adj.) = ada J.V,91 (purisâdaka man-eater). (Page 25)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】吃的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】吃的人。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adana: {'def': '【中】食。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [from adeti] eating, food J.V,374 (v.l. modana). (Page 25)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】食。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adasaka: {'def': '(adj.) see dasā. (Page 25)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adassana: {'def': '【中】缺席，消失。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(a不+dassana见),【形】【中】缺席，消失，瞶眛，看不见。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adassāvin: {'def': '(a不+dassāvin有见),【形】不见。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adati: {'def': '(ad + a), 吃。 adi, 【过】。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ad+a), 吃。adi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adaṁsu: {'def': '[dadāti给与?施] 的【3.复.过】, 给与。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adda: {'def': '【形】润湿的，生的（水果），未熟的（水果）。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² & Addā 3^rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2. a. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ (adj.) [Sk. ārdra, from ṛdati or ardati to melt, cp. Gr. a)ρdw to moisten, a)\\rda dirt; see also alla] wet, moist, slippery J.IV,353; VI,309; Miln.346.

--âvalepana “smeared with moisture”, i. e. shiny, glittering S.IV,187 (kūṭāgāra); M.I,86=Nd² 199⁶ (upakāriyo). See also addha².

The reading allâvalepana occurs at Nd² 40 (=S iv. 187), and is perhaps to be preferred. The meaning is better to be given as “newly plastered.” (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Sk. ārdraka] ginger J.I,244 (°singivera). (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】润湿的，生的(水果)，未熟的(水果)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Addaka: {'def': '(梵ārdraka ),【中】生姜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】生姜。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Addakkhi: {'def': '(dakkhati 的【过】)。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '3^rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 1 b. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '([dakkhati看] 的【过】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Addasa: {'def': 'Addasā, 见 ([dassati见] 的【2.单.过】、【3.单.过】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'addasā, ([dakkhati看] 的【过特】), 他看了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'addasā, (dakkhati 的【过特】), 他看了。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Addasā: {'def': '3^rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2 a. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Addha: {'def': '¹ (num.) [= aḍḍha, q. v.] one half, half (°-) D.I,166 (°māsika); A.II,160 (°māsa); J.I,59 (°yojana); III, 189 (°māsa). (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(skt. ardha),(=aḍḍha半)。II.(=addhan)旅路、时间。addhamāsa,【阳】半个月。ardhāsana,【梵】半座。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】一半。 ~māsa,【阳】半个月。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [= adda³, Sk. ārdra] soiled, wet; fig. attached to, intoxicated with (cp. sineha) M.II,223 (na anaddhabhūtaṁ attānaṁ dukkhena addhabhāveti he dirties the impure self with ill); S.III,1 (addhabhūto kāyo impure body); J.VI,548 (°nakha with dirty nails, C. pūtinakha). (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Addhagata: {'def': '(addha旅路+gata去【过分】),【形】【阳】活过一世人生，老人(日语：お年寄り,otosiyoli)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】活过一世人生。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Addhagū: {'def': '(addhan旅路+gū行),【阳】旅行者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】旅行者。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Addhamāsa: {'def': '(addha半+māsa月) 【中】半个月(=aḍḍhamāsa)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Addhan: {'def': '(in cpds. addha°) [Vedic adhvan, orig. meaning “stretch, length”, both of space & time. -- Cases: Nom. addhā, Gen. Dat. addhuno, Instr. addhunā, Acc. addhānaṁ, Loc. addhani; pl. addhā. See also addhāna] 1. (of space) a path, road, also journey (see cpds. & derivations); only in one ster. phrase J.IV,384 =.V,137 (pathaddhuno paṇṇarase va cando, Gen. for Loc. °addhani, on his course, in his orbit; expl^d. at IV.384 by ākāsa-patha-saṅkhātassa addhuno majjhe ṭhito and at.V,137 by pathaddhagato addha-pathe gaganamajjhe ṭhito); Pv III,3¹ (pathaddhani paṇṇarase va cando; Loc. same meaning as prec., expl^d. at PvA.188 by attano pathabhūte addhani gaganatala-magge). This phrase (pathaddhan) however is expl^d. by Kern (Toev. s. v. pathaddu) as “gone half-way”, i. e. on full-moon-day. He rejects the expl^n. of C. -- 2. (of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a lifetime (see cpds.); only in two standard applications viz. (a) as mode of time (past, present & future) in tayo addhā three divisions of time (atita, anāgata, paccuppanna) D.III,216; It.53, 70. (b) in phrase dīghaṁ addhānaṁ (Acc.) a very long time A.II,1, 10 (dighaṁ addhānaṁ saṁsāraṁ); Sn.740 (dīghaṁ addhāna saṁsāra); Dh.207 (dīghaṁ addhāna socati); J.I,137. Gen. dīghassa addhuno PvA.148 (gatattā because a long time has elapsed), Instr. dīghena addhunā S.I,78; A.II,118; PvA.28.

--āyu duration of life A.II,66 (dīghaṁ °ṁ a long lifetime. --gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span of life, an old man [cp. BSk. adhvagata M Vastu II,150], always comb^d. with vayo anuppatto, sometimes in ster. formula with jiṇṇa & mahallaka Vin.II,188; D.I,48 (cp. DA.I,143); M.I,82; Sn.pp. 50, 92; PvA.149. --gū [Vedic adhvaga] a wayfarer, traveller, journeyman Th.255 = S.I,212 (but the latter has panthagu, v. l. addhagū); J.III,95 (v. l. patthagu = panthagu); Dh.302. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Addhaneyya: {'def': '(adj.) = adhaniya 2, lasting J.V,507 (an°). (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Addhaniya: {'def': '(‹addhan旅路?时间),【形】可旅行的，永久的，永恒的，持久的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. addhan] 1. belonging to the road, fit for travelling (of the travelling season) Th.1, 529. ‹-› 2. belonging to a (long) time, lasting a long period, lasting, enduring D.III,211; J.I,393 (an°) VI,71. See also addhaneyya. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可旅行的，永久的，永恒的，持久的。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Addhariya: {'def': '[Vedic adhvaryu fr. adhvara sacrifice] a sacrificing priest, N. of a class of Brahmins D.I,237 (brāhmaṇa). (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Addhika: {'def': '[fr. addhan] a wanderer, wayfarer, traveller DA.I,298 (= pathāvin), 270; PvA.78, 127 (°jana people travelling). Often comb^d. with kapaṇa beggar, tramp, as kapaṇaddhikā (pl.) tramps and travellers (in which connection also as °iddhika, q. v.), e. g. J.I,6 (v. l. °iddhika 262; DhA.II,26. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】旅行者，旅客。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】旅行者，旅客。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Addhin: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. addhan] belonging to the road or travelling, one who is on the road, a traveller, in gataddhin one who has performed his journey (= addhagata) Dh.90. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Addhita: {'def': 'at Pv.II,6² is to be corrected to aṭṭita (sic v. l. BB). (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Addhunā: {'def': '( [addhan旅路?时间] 的【工】), 旅路?时间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Addhuva: {'def': '【形】不稳定的，暂时的，非永久的。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不稳定的，暂时的，非永久的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see dhuva. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Addhā: {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic addhā, cp. Av. azdā certainty] part. of affirmation and emphasis: certainly, for sure, really, truly D.I,143; J.I,19 (a. ahaṁ Buddho bhavissāmi) 66 (a. tvaṁ Buddho bhavissasi), 203, 279; III,340; V,307, 410 (C. expl^n. differs) Sn.47, 1057; Nd² 30 = Ps.II,21 (ekaṁsa-vacanaṁ nissaṁsaya-vacanaṁ etc.) addhā hi J.IV, 399; Pv IV.1^{5 2}. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.路径。2.时间，世。tayo addhā,三时(three times)，atīto addhā,过去时(past time)，anāgato addhā,未来时(future time)，paccuppanno addhā,现在时(present time)【副】的确。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】一定，必定，真正地，实际上，确实，实在，当然，固然，甚至，真的。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】一定，必定，真正地，实际上，确实，实在，真的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 路径。 2. 时间。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Addhāna: {'def': '(nt.) [orig. the Acc. of addhan, taken as nt. from phrase dīghaṁ addhānaṁ. It occurs only in Acc. which may always be taken as Acc. of addhan; thus the assumption of a special form addhāna would be superfluous, were it not for later forms like addhāne (Loc.) Miln.126; PvA.75 v. l. BB, and for cpds.] same meaning as addhan, but as simplex only used with reference to time (i. e. a long time, cp. VvA.117 addhānaṁ = ciraṁ). Usually in phrase atītaṁ (anāgataṁ etc.) addhānaṁ in the past (future etc.), e. g. D.I,200; S.I,140; A.V,32; Miln.126 (anāgatamaddhāne for °aṁ); PvA.75 (v. l. addhāne). dīghaṁ addhānaṁ Pv.I,10⁵. Also in phrase addhānaṁ āpādeti to make out the length of time or period, i. e. to live out one’s lifetime S.IV,110; J.II,293 (= jīvitaddhānaṁ āpādi āyuṁ vindi C).

--daratha exhaustion from travelling DA.I,287. --magga a (proper) road for journeying, a long road between two towns, high road D.I,1, 73, 79; M.I,276 (kantār°); DA.I,35 (interpreted as “addhayojanaṁ gacchissāmī ti bhuñjitabban ti ādi vacanato addha-yojanam pi addhāna maggo hoti”, thus taken to addha “half”, from counting by 1/2 miles); VvA.40, 292. Cp. also antarāmagga. --parissama “fatigue of the road”, i. e. fatigue from travelling VvA.305. --vemattatā difference of time or period Miln.285 (+ āyuvemattatā). (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】很长的路途、时间或旅程。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】很长的路途、长时间(世)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Addhānamagga: {'def': '(addhāna旅路+magga道), 旅路道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Addhānamaggapaṭipanna: {'def': '(addhānamagga旅路道+paṭipanna对…行【过分】),【过分】对旅路道行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Addi: {'def': '【阳】山。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】山。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. ardri] a mountain Dāvs II,13. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Addita: {'def': '【过分】已苦恼，已十分忧虑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已苦恼，已十分忧虑。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pp.) [see aṭṭita which is the more correct spelling] afflicted, smarted, oppressed J.I,21; II,407; III,261; IV,295; V,53, 268; Th.1, 406; Mhvs 1, 25; PvA.260; Sdhp.37, 281. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Addā: {'def': '【阴】参宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Addāyanā at Vbh.371 in def. of anādariya is either faulty writing, or dial. form or pop. etym. for ādā and ādāyana; see ādariya. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】参宿(二十七星宿(ㄒㄧㄡˋ)之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Addāyate: {'def': '[v. denom. fr. adda] to be or get wet, fig. to be attached to J.IV,351. See also allīyati. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adeti: {'def': '[Sk. ādayati, Caus. of atti, ad to eat, 1^st sg. admi = Gr. e)/dw, Lat. edo; Goth. itan = Ohg. ezzan = E. eat] to eat. Pres. ind. ademi etc. J.V,31, 92, 197, 496; VI,106. pot. adeyya J.V,107, 392, 493. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adha-: {'def': '以下(see under adho)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhama: {'def': '【形】恶劣的，低劣的，卑贱的。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '([ adho向下] 的最高级) ),【形】最下的，低劣的，卑贱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic adhama = Lat. infimus, superl. of adho, q. v.] the lowest (lit. & fig.), the vilest, worst Sn.246 (narâdhama), 135 (vasalâdhama); Dh.78 (purisa°); J.III,151 (miga°); V,394 (uttamâdhama), 437 (id.), 397; Sdhp.387. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhamma: {'def': '(a非+dhamma法),【阳】1.不检点的行为。2.邪法、非法。A.7.79./IV,141︰Ye kho tvaṁ, Upāli, dhamme jāneyyāsi--‘ime dhammā na 1ekantanibbidāya 2virāgāya 3nirodhāya 4upasamāya 5abhiññāya 6sambodhāya 7nibbānāyasaṁvattantī’ti ekaṁsena, Upāli, dhāreyyāsi--‘neso dhammo neso vinayo netaṁ Satthusāsanan’ti. Ye ca kho tvaṁ, Upāli, dhamme jāneyyāsi--‘ime dhammā 1ekantanibbidāya 2virāgāya 3nirodhāya 4upasamāya 5abhiññāya 6sambodhāya 7nibbānāya saṁvattatī’ti; ekaṁsena, Upāli, dhāreyyāsi--‘eso dhammo eso vinayo etaṁ Satthusāsanan’”ti.(优波利！即任何法，你若知这些法，不能生起1一向厌背(ekantanibbidāya厌离、不满之意)，2离染(virāgāya)、3灭(nirodhāya；染等之灭、不生起)、4寂静(upasamāya；染污的寂静)、5通智(abhiññāya全面知，无常等三相熟练之后，全面知之意)、6正觉(sambodhāya三菩提，觉悟四圣谛。四道智被称为‘菩提’。)、7涅盘(nibbānāya)，优波利！则是非法、非律、非师教，不必持。优波利！又，即任何法，汝若知这些法，生起1一向厌背，2离染、3灭、4寂静、5通智、6正觉、7涅盘，优波利！则是法、是律、是师教，必当持。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see dhamma. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 不检点的行为。2. 邪法。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhara: {'def': '【阳】唇。【形】较低的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】唇。【形】较低的。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic adhara, compar. of adho] the lower J.III,26 (adharoṭṭha the l. lip). (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adha°: {'def': 'in cpds. like adhagga see under adho. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhi: {'def': '【介】一直到，在上，之上，在上面。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic adhi; base of demonstr. pron. a° + suffix-dhi, corresponding in form to Gr. e)/n-qa “on this” = here, cp. o(/qi where, in meaning equal to adv. of direction Gr. dέ (toward) = Ohg. zuo, E. to].

A. Prep. and pref. of direction & place: (a) as direction denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal = up to, over, toward, to, on (see C 1 a). -- (b) as place where (prep. c. Loc. or abs.) = on top of, above, over, in; in addition to. Often simply deictic “here” (e. g.) ajjhatta = adhi + ātman “this self here” (see C 1 b).

B. adhi is freq. as modification pref., i. e. in loose comp^n. with n. or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd. , like ajjhā° (adhi + ā), adhippa° (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed base, i. e. as 2^nd part of a pref.‹-› cpd., like ā in paccā° (prati + ā), paryā° (pari + ā) or ava in paryava° (pari + ava) or ud in abhyud° (abhi + ud), samud° (sam + ud). As such (i. e. modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning “over above, in addition, quite, par excellence, super”--(adhideva a super-god, cp. ati-deva), but very often has lost this power & become meaningless (like E. up in “shut up, fill up, join up etc), esp. in double pref.-cpds. (ajjhāvasati “to dwell here-in” = āvasati “to dwell in, to inhabit”) (see C 2). -- In the expl^ns of P. Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far-fetchedly) interpreted by abhibhū “overpowering” see e. g. C. on adhiṭṭhāti & adhiṭṭhita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that P. adhi often represents Sk. ati or abhi; thus adhi › ati in adhikusala, °kodhita, °jeguccha, °brahmā; adhi › abhi in adhippatthita, °pātcti, °ppāya, °ppeta, °bādheti, °bhū, °vāha. Cp. also ati IV.

C. The main applications of adhi are the foll.: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb determinate, either lit. or fig. -- (a) where to: adhiyita (adhi + ita) “gone on to or into” = studied; ajjhesita (adhi + esita) “wished for”; °kata “put to” i. e. commissioned; °kāra commission; °gacchati “to go on to & reach it” = obtain; °gama attainment; °gaṇhāti to overtake = surpass, °peta (adhi + pra + ita) “gone in to” = meant, understood; °pāya sense meaning, intention; °bhāsati to speak to = address; °mutta intent upon; °vacana “saying in addition” = attribute, metaphor, cp. Fr. sur-nom; °vāsāna assent, °vāseti to dwell in, give in = consent. -- (b) where: °tiṭṭhati (°ṭṭhāti) to stand by = look after, perform; °ṭṭhāna place where; °vasati to inhabit; °sayana “lying in”, inhabiting. -- 2. secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi-jeguccha very detestable; °matta “in an extreme measure”, °pa supreme lord; °pacca lordship; °paññā higher, additional wisdom; °vara the very best; °sīla thorough character or morality. -- (b) with verbs (in double pref.-cpds.); adhi + ava: ajjhogāheti plunge into; ajjhoṭhapeti to bring down to (its destination); °otthata covered completely; °oharati to swallow right down. adhi + ā: ajjhappatta having reached (the end); ajjhapīḷita quite overwhelmed; °āvuttha inhabited; °ārūhati grown up over; °āsaya desire, wish (cp. Ger. n. Anliegen & v. daranliegen). adhi + upa: ajjhupagacchati to reach, obtain; °upeti to receive; °upekkhati “to look all along over” = to superintend adhi + pra: adhippattheti to long for, to desire.

Note. The contracted (assimilation-)form of adhi before vowels is ajjh- (q. v.). (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhi-: {'def': '【字首】一直到，在…上，增上，在上面，上等。例子︰ajjhārāmā（adhiārāmā），adhi有强调地点的作用，当「adhi＋母音开头的字」时，就会变音为「ajjh＋母音开头的字」，参《巴英辞典》10页b。ārāma，寺院。ajjhāvasatha(addhi+āvasatha房间)房间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhibhavati: {'def': '[adhi + bhavati, cp. Sk. & P. abhibhavati] to overcome, overpower, surpass S.IV,185 sq. (cp. adhibhū); A.V,248, 282 (°bhoti); J.II,336; V,30. -- aor. adhibhavi J.II,80. 3. pl. adhibhaṁsu S.IV,185. See also ajjhabhavi & ajjhabhū pp. adhibhūta (q. v.). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi + bhū + a), 击败。 ~bhavi, 【过】。 adhibhūta, 【过分】。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+bhū+a), 击败。adhibhavi,【过】。adhibhūta,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhibhāsati: {'def': '(adhi在…上+bhāsati说) 对…说。【过】ajjhabhāsi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[adhi + bhāsati] to address, to speak to; aor. ajjhabhāsi Vin.II,195; S.I,103; IV,117; Sn.p. 87; PvA.56, 90. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhibhū: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. adhi + bhū, cp. adhibhavati & Sk. adhibhū] overpowering, having power over; master, conqueror, lord S.IV,186 (anadhibhū not mastering. For adhibhūta the v. l. abhi° is to be preferred as more usual in this connection, see abhibhū); Sn.684 (miga°; v. l. abhi°). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhibhūta: {'def': '[cp. adhibhū & adhibhūta] overpowered S.IV,186. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhibrahmā: {'def': '[adhi-brahmā cf. ati-brahmā] すぐれたる梵, 上梵.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[adhi + Brahmā, cp. atibrahmā] a superior Brahmā, higher than Brahmā M.II,132. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[adhi-brahmā cf. ati-brahmā] 優勝梵, 上梵.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Adhibādheti: {'def': '[adhi + bādheti, cp. Sk. abhibādhayati] to vex, oppress, gore (to death) Ud.8 (T. adhipāteti, v. l. avibādeti). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhicca: {'def': '³ (adj.) [= adhicca 2 in adj. function, influenced by, homonym abhabba] without a cause (for assumption), unreasonable, unlikely S.V,457. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (°-) [Sk. *adhṛtya, a + *dhicca, ger. of dhṛ, cp. dhāra, dhāraṇa 3, dhāreti 4] unsupported, uncaused, fortuitous, without cause or reason; in foll. phrases: °āpattika guilty without intention M.I,443; °uppatti spontaneous origin DhsA.238; °laddha obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly Vv 84²² = J.V,171 = VI,315 (expl^d. at J.V,171 by ahetunā, at VI,316 by akā‹-› raṇena) °samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous, unconditioned D.I,28 = Ud.69; D.III,33, 138; S.II,22--23 (sukhadukkhaṁ); A.III,440 (id.); Ps.I,155; DA.I,118 (= akāraṇa°). (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhīyati 的【独】), 学会了或背诵了。 ~samuppanna,【形】不需要因素就能生起，自然的。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1 (adhīyati 的【独】), 学会了或背诵了。adhiccasamuppanna,【形】不需要因素就能生起，自然的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '3 , 没有理由的(without a cause (for assumption), unreasonable)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [ger. of adhi + eti, see adhīyati] learning, studying, learning by heart J.III,218, 327 = IV.301; IV,184 (vede = adhīyitvā C.), 477 (sajjhāyitvā C.); VI,213; Miln.164. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(Sk. *adhrtya, a + *dhicca, ger. of dhr), 未支持，无因的(unsupported, uncaused, fortuitous, without cause or reason)。adhiccāpattika,无心之过(guilty without intention)。adhiccuppatti,(spontaneous origin)。adhiccaladdha,(obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly)。adhiccasamuppanna,(arisen without a cause, spontaneous, unconditioned)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhiceto: {'def': '(adhi上等+ceto心),【中】较高的心(lofty-minded, entranced)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [adhi + ceto] lofty-minded, entranced Th.1, 68 = Ud.43 = Vin.IV,54 = DhA.III,384. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhicitta: {'def': '【中】 1. 较高的心思。 2. 入定的心。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [adhi + citta] “higher thought”, meditation, contemplation, usually in comb^n. with adhisīla and adhipaññā Vin.I,70; D.III,219; M.I,451; A.I,254, 256; Nd¹ 39 = Nd² 689 (°sikkhā); Dh.185 (= aṭṭha-samāpattisaṅkhāta adhika-citta DhA.III,238). (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi上等+citta心),【中】较高的心(上等心、增上心)，入定的心( “higher thought”, meditation, contemplation)。AA.3.100./II,364.：adhicittaṁ samathavipassanācittameva.(增上心︰止与观的心)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhiciṇṇa: {'def': 'only at S.III,12, where v. l. is aviciṇṇa, which is to be preferred. See viciṇṇa. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhideva: {'def': '[adhi + deva] a superior or supreme god, above the gods M.II,132; A.IV,304; Sn.1148; Nd² 307^b, 422 a. Cp. atideva. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhigacchati: {'def': '(adhi在…上+gam去+a), 1.达到，获得，证得。2.领悟。adhigacchi,【过】。【3.单.过】ajjhagā。【3.复.过】ajjhāgamuṁ。【3.单.祈】adhigacche。adhigaccheyya。【过分】adhigata。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[adhi + gacchati] to get to, to come into possession of, to acquire, attain, find; fig. to understand D.I,229 (vivesaṁ) M.I,140 (anvesaṁ n’âdhigacchanti do not find); S.I,22 (Nibbānaṁ); II,278 (id.); A.I,162 (id.); Dh.187, 365; It.82 (santiṁ); Th.2, 51; Pug.30, 31; Pv.I,7⁴ (nibbutiṁ = labhati PvA.37); III,7¹⁰ (amataṁ padaṁ). opt. adhigaccheyya D.I,224 (kusalaṁ dhammaṁ); M.I,114 (madhu-piṇḍikaṁ); Dh.61 and adhigacche Dh.368. ger. °gantvā D.I,224; J.I,45 (ānisaṁse); and °gamma Pv.I,11⁹ (= vinditvā paṭilabhitvā PvA.60). grd. °gantabba It.104 (nibbāna). cond. °gacchissaṁ Sn.446. 1^st aor. 3 sg. ajjhagā Sn.225 (= vindi paṭilabhi KhA 180); Dh.154; Vv 32⁷; 3 pl. ajjhagū J.I,256 (vyasanaṁ) & ajjhāgamuṁ S.I,12. 2^nd aor. 3 sg. adhigacchi Nd¹ 457. ‹-› pp. adhigata (q. v.). (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi + gam + a), 1. 达到，获得。 2. 领悟。 adhigacchi, 【过】。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhigama: {'def': '【阳】达到，知识。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹adhigacchati获得),【阳】获得，证得，达到，知识。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. adhigacchati] attainment, acquisition; also fig. knowledge, information, study (the latter mainly in Miln) D.III,255; S.II,139; A.II,148; IV,22, 332; V,194; J.I,406; Nett 91; Miln.133, 215, 358, 362, 388; PvA.207. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhigameti: {'def': '(adhi + gam + e), 参考 adhigacchati。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+gam去+e), 1.达到，获得。2.领悟。参考 adhigacchati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[adhi + gameti, Caus. of gacchati] to make obtain, to procure PvA.30. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhigata: {'def': '(adhigacchati‘达到’的【过分】)达到。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhigacchati 的【过分】) 。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of adhigacchati] got into possession of, conquered, attained, found J.I,374; VvA.135. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhigatavant: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. adhigata] one who has found or obtained VvA.296 (Nibbānaṁ). (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhigaṇhāti: {'def': '(adhi在…上+gah+ṇhā), 超越，持有，击败。adhigaṇhi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhi + gah + ṇhā), 超越，持有，击败。 adhigaṇhi, 【过】。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[adhi + gaṇhāti] to surpass, excel S.I,87 = DA.I,32; D.III,146; S.IV,275; A.III,33; It.19. Ger. adhigayha Pv.II,9⁶² = DhA.III,219 (v. l. BB at both pass. atikkamma); & adhiggahetvā It.20. -- pp. adhiggahīta (q. v.). (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhiggahita: {'def': '(adhigaṇhāti‘超越’的【过分】) 超越。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhigaṇhāti 的【过分】)。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhiggahīta: {'def': '[pp. of adhigaṇhāti] excelled, surpassed; overpowered, taken by (Instr.), possessed J.III,427 (= anuggahīta C.); V,102; VI,525 = 574; It.103; Miln.188, 189; Sdhp.98. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhijeguccha: {'def': '(nt.) [adhi + jeguccha] intense scrupulous regard (for others) D.I,174, 176. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. adhi; cp. Sk. adhika] exceeding, extraordinary, superior, Pug.35; VvA.80 (= anadhivara, visiṭṭha); DA.I,141, 222; Dpvs.V,32 (an°); DhA.III,238; KhA 193 (= anuttara); Sdhp.337, 447. -- compar. adhikatara DhA.II,7; III,176; nt. °ṁ as adv. extraordinarily PvA.86 (= adhimattaṁ). In comb^n. with numerals adhika has the meaning of “in addition, with an additional, plus” (cp. ādi + ādika, with which it is evidently confounded, adhika being constructed in the same way as ādika, i. e. preceding the noun-determination), e. g. catunahutâdhikāni dve yojana-sahassāni 2000 + 94 (= 294 000) J.I,25; sattamāsâdhikāni sattavassāni 7 years and 7 months J.V,319; paññāsâdhikāni pañca vassa-satani 500 + 50 (= 550) PvA.152. See also sâdhika. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】胜过的，优势的。 ~tara,【形】更胜的。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹adhi在…上?上等; cp. Sk. adhika),【形】胜过的，优势的(superior, Pug.35; VvA.80 (= anadhivara, visiṭṭha))。adhikatara,【形】更胜的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhikamāsa: {'def': '﹐【阳】闰月。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhikaraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [adhi + karaṇa] 1. attendance, supervision, management of affairs, administration PvA.209. ‹-› 2. relation, reference, reason, cause, consequence D.II,59 (-°: in consequence of); S.II,41; V,19. Esp. Acc. °ṁ as adv. (-°) in consequence of, for the sake of, because of, from M.I,410 (rūpâdhikaraṇaṁ); S.IV,339 (rāga°); Miln.281 (mudda° for the sake of the royal seal, orig. in attendance on the r. s.). Kimâdhikaraṇaṁ why, on account of what J.IV,4 (= kiṁkāraṇaṁ) yatvâdhikaraṇaṁ (yato + adhi°) by reason of what, since, because (used as conj.) D.I,70 = A.I,113 = II,16 = D.III,225. -- 3. case, question, cause, subject of discussion, dispute. There are 4 sorts of a. enum^d. at var. passages, viz. vivāda° anuvāda° āpatta° kicca° “questions of dispute, of censure, of misconduct, of duties” Vin.II,88; III,164; IV,126, 238; M.II,247. ‹-› Often ref.: Vin.II,74; S.IV,63 = V,346 (dhamma° a question of the Dh.); A.I,53 (case), 79; II,239 (vūpasanta); V,71, 72; Pug.20, 55; DhA.IV,2 (°ssa uppamassa vūpasama), adhikaraṇaṁ karoti to raise a dispute M.I,122 °ṁ vūpasameti to settle a question or difficulty Vin.II,261.

--kāraka one who causes dispute discussions or dissent Vin.IV,230 (f. °ikā); A.III,252. --samatha the settlings of questions that have arisen. There are seven rules for settling cases enum^d. at D.III,254; M.II,247; A.I,99; IV,144. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】起诉，诉讼，控告。 adhikaraṇaŋ, 【副】结果，因为，为了。 ~samatha,【阳】争论或诉讼的解决。 adhikaraṇika,【阳】法官。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+karaṇa作) ,【中】案件，起诉，诉讼，控告，在…上作。adhikaraṇaṁ,【副】结果，因为，为了。adhikaraṇasamatha,【阳】争论或诉讼的解决。adhikaraṇika,【阳】法官。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhikaraṇaṁ: {'def': '【副】由於。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhikaraṇika: {'def': '[fr. adhikaraṇa] one who has to do with the settling of disputes or questions, a judge A.V,164, 167. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhikaraṇī: {'def': '(f.) [to adhikaraṇa 1, orig. meaning “serving, that which serves, i. e. instrument”] a smith’s anvil J.III,285; Dāvs III,16 sq.; DhsA.263. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】铁砧。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】铁砧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhikata: {'def': '【形】受委任的，促成的。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】受委任的，促成的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [adhi + kata; cp. Sk. adhikṛta] 1. commissioned with, an overseer, Pv.II,9²⁷ (dāne adhikata = ṭhapita PvA.124). -- 2. caused by Miln.67 (kamma°). ‹-› 3. affected by something, i. e. confused, puzzled, in doubt Miln.144 (+ vimātijāta). (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhikodhita: {'def': '(adj.) [adhi + kodhita] very angry J.V,117. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhikoṭṭana: {'def': '【中】断头台或屠夫用的案板。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】断头台或屠夫用的案板。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhikusala: {'def': '(adj.) [adhi + kusala] in °ā dhammā “items of higher righteousness” D.III,145. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhikuṭṭanā: {'def': '(f.) [adhi + koṭṭanā or koṭṭana] an executioner’s block Th.2, 58; cp. ThA.65 (v. l. kuḍḍanā, should prob. be read koṭṭana); ThA.287. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhikāra: {'def': '【阳】 1. 管理。 2. 办公室。 3. 热望。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. adhikāra] attendance, service, administration, supervision, management, help Vin.I,55; J.I,56; VI,251; Miln.60, 115, 165; PvA.124 (dāna°; cp. Pv.II,9²⁷); DhA.II,41. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.管理。2.办公室。3.热望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhikārika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [to adhikāra] serving as, referring to Vin.III,274 (Bdhgh). (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimana: {'def': '(n.-adj.) [adhi + mano] (n.) attention, direction of mind, concentration Sn.692 (adhimanasā bhavātha). ‹-› (adj.) directing one’s mind upon, intent (on) J.IV,433 (= pasannacitta); V,29 (an°; v. l. °māna). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimatta: {'def': '【形】非常的，太多。adhimattā,【阴】过度，太丰富。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】非常的，太多。 adhimattā,【阴】过度，太丰富。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [adhi + matta of mā] extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; nt. adv. °ṁ extremely M.I,152, 243; S.IV,160; A.II,150; IV,241; J.I,92; Pug.15; Miln.146, 189, 274, 290; Pv.II,3⁶ (= adhikataraṁ PvA.86); DhA.II,85; cp. PvA.281. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimattata: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. prec.] preponderance A.II,150; DhsA.334 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 200). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimoceti: {'def': '( adhimuccati‘信解’【使】),使…信解。【2.单.命】adhimocehi。【过分】adhimocita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhimokkha: {'def': '【阳】坚固的决心，决心。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹[adhi在…上﹑上等]+[muc释放﹑出声] ),【阳】确定。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(‹[adhi在…上﹑上等]+[muc释放﹑出声] ),【阳】坚固的决心，决心，确定。《广释》(Vibhv.p.82；CS:p.106)：adhimuccanaṁ adhimokkho, so sanniṭṭhānalakkhaṇo, ārammaṇe niccalabhāvena indakhīlo viya daṭṭhabbo.(诸信解为‘胜解’，它具有探查相，在所缘上以不动的状态，就像见到(稳固的)因陀陀柱一样。)。《广释》(Vibhv.p.206.；CS:pg.271)︰balavasaddhindriyasaṅkhāto adhimokkho.(胜解︰有力的信根之谓)(十种观染定义「胜解」) 《清净道论》(Vism.466.)：Adhimuccanaṁ adhimokkho. So sanniṭṭhānalakkhaṇo, asaṁsappanaraso, nicchayapaccupaṭṭhāno, sanniṭṭheyyadhammapadaṭṭhāno, ārammaṇe niccalabhāvena indakhīlo viya daṭṭhabbo.(「胜解」等於信解。有确信的特相；有不犹豫的作用；以决定为现状；以确信之法为近因。当知它於所缘有不动的状态，如因陀罗的柱石(indakhila界标)。)「胜解」不包括在疑相应心里，因当时的心摇摆不定。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. adhi + muc] firm resolve, determination, decision M.III,25 sq.; Vbh.165 sq., 425; DhsA.145, 264. See Dhs. trsl. 5; Cpd. 17, 40, 95. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimucca: {'def': '【中】信解，胜解。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhimuccana: {'def': '【中】 1. 决定。 2. 鬼入身。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. adhi + muc] making up one’s mind, confidence DhsA.133, 190. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.决定。2.鬼入身。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhimuccati: {'def': '(adhi 在…上+muc(梵muc / moks)释放+ya), 1.信解(直译：被确定)。2.被阴灵入身。adhimucci,【过】。adhimutta,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhi + muc + ya), 1. 附上或倾向。 2. 被阴灵入身。 adhimucci,【过】。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Pass. of adhi + muc] 1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c. Loc.) S.III,225; IV,185; A.IV,24, 145 sq., 460; V,17; Pug.63. ‹-› 2. to become settled, to make up one’s mind as to (with Loc.), to become clear about Vin.I,209 (aor. °mucci); D.I,106; S.I,116 (pot. °mucceyya); It.43; DA.I,275. ‹-› 3. to take courage, to have faith Sn.559; Miln.234; DA.I,214, 316; J.IV,272; V,103; DhA.I,196; III,258; IV,170. ‹-› 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a body, with Loc. of the body. A late idiom for the older anvāvisati. J.IV,172; V,103, 429; DhA.I,196; III,258; IV,170. ‹-› pp. adhimuccita and adhimutta. -- Caus. adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with Loc.) S.V,409 (cittaṁ devesu a.). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimucchita: {'def': '(adhimucchati 的【过分】), 已入迷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhimucchati 的【过分】), 已入迷。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhimuccita: {'def': '& Adhimucchita (pp.) [either adhi + muc or mūrch; it would seem more probable to connect it with the former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all vv. ll. °mucchita as spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have to assume a regular analogy-form °mucchita, cp. mucchati and see also J.P.T.S. 1886, 109] drawn towards, attached to, infatuated, indulging in (with Loc.) M.II,223 (an°); S.I,113; Th.1, 732 (v. l. °muccita), 923 (cch), 1175; J.II,437 (cch); III,242; V,255 (kāmesu °mucchita, v. l. °muccita). Cp. ajjhomucchita. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimuccitar: {'def': '[n. ag. of adhimuccati] one who determines for something, easily trusting, giving credence A.III,165 (v. l. °mucchitā). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimutta: {'def': '(adhimuccati‘信解、被确定’的【过分】), 已意图，已倾向。 adhimuttaka, 阿提牟哆华，增上信花。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhimuccati 的【过分】), 已意图，已倾向。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of adhimuccati, cp. BSk. adhimukta. Av. Ś I,8, 112; Divy 49, 302 etc.] intent upon (-° or with Loc. or Acc.), applying oneself to, keen on, inclined to, given to Vin.I,183; A.V,34, 38; Dh.226; Sn.1071, 1149 (°citta); Nd² 33; J.I,370 (dān°) Pug.26; PvA.134 (dān°). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimutti: {'def': '(f.) [adhi + mutti] resolve, intention, disposition D.I,174; A.V,36; Ps.I,124; Miln.161, 169; Vbh.340, 341; DA.I,44, 103; Sdhp.378. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】决心，性情。 ~ka, 【形】倾向，执着。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】决心，性情。adhimuttika,【形】倾向，执著。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhimuttika: {'def': '(adj.) [= adhimutta] inclined to, attached to, bent on S.II,154, 158; It.70; Vbh.339 sq. + tā (f.) inclination D.I,2. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimāna: {'def': '【阳】过度的自我估计，增上慢。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】过度的自我估计。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[adhi + māna] undue estimate of oneself M.II,252; A.V,162 sq. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhimānika: {'def': '【形】实际上未证得神圣的智慧，却认为自己已证得。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. adhimāna] having undue confidence in oneself, conceited A.V,162, 169, 317; DhA.III,111. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】实际上未证得神圣的智慧，却认为自己已证得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhipa: {'def': 'adhipati,【阳】君主，主人，统治者。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'adhipati, adhippati,【阳】君主，主人，统治者。trayāha adhipatiwiksāh﹐三增上学。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. adhipa, abbrev. of adhipati] ruler, lord, master J.II,369; III,324; V,393; Pv.II,8⁶ (jan° king); Dāvs III,52; VvA.314. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhipacca: {'def': '(adhipati主+ya (抽象名词) ) 【中】主权。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhipati主+ya (抽象名词) ) ,【中】主权。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhipajjati: {'def': '[adhi + pajjati] to come to, reach, attain A.IV,96 (anatthaṁ); pp. adhipanna. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+pajjati行), 到达。adhipanna,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhipaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. prec.] mastering, ruling or governed, influenced by (cp. adhipati) A.I,150 (atta° loka° dhamma°). (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhipanna: {'def': '1.【过分】到达。2.【过分】抓住(adhipajjati‘到达’的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. abhipanna, adhi + pad] gone into, affected with, seized by (-°), a victim of (c. Loc.) S.I,72, Th.2, 345 (kāmesu); Sn.1123 (taṇhā° = taṇhânugata Nd² 32); Dh.288; J.III,38, 369; IV,396; V,91, 379 (= dosena ajjhotthaṭa); VI,27. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】痛苦于…，进入。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhipatana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. adhipatati] attack, pressing ThA.271. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 攻击。 2. 降临。 3. 跳跃。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】1.攻击。2.降临。3.跳跃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhipatati: {'def': '[adhi + patati] to fly past, vanish J.IV,111 (= ativiya patati sīghaṁ atikkamati C.). -- Caus. adhipāteti (q. v.) in diff. meaning. Cp. also adhipāta. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhipateyya: {'def': '(nt.) A.I,147; III 33 = S.IV,275 is probably misreading for ādhipateyya. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhipati: {'def': '(n.-adj.) [adhi + pati, cp. adhipa] 1. ruler, master J.IV,223; Vv 81¹; Miln.388; DhA.I,36 (= seṭṭha). ‹-› 2. ruling over, governing, predominant; ruled or governed by Vbh.216 sq. (chandaṁ adhipatiṁ katvā making energy predominant); DhsA.125, 126 (atta° autonomous, loka° heteronomous, influenced by society). See alṣo Dhs. trsl. 20 & Cpd. 60. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhipatikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. adhipāta²] a moth, a mosquito Nd¹ 484 (see adhipāta²). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhipatipaccaya: {'def': '﹐ādhipatipaccaya﹐【阳】增上缘( predominance condition)。不能当所缘增上缘的心：瞋根心2个、痴根心2个、苦俱身识1个。不能当所缘增上缘的心所：瞋、嫉、悭、恶作、疑。因此，没有「逆增上缘」，逆境或不如意境只能作「自然亲依止缘」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhipatthita: {'def': '[pp. adhi + pattheti, cp. Sk. abhi + arthayati] desired, wished, begged for D.I,120. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhipaññā: {'def': '【阴】较高的智慧。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [adhi + paññā] higher wisdom or knowledge, insight (cp. jhāna & paññā); usually in comb^n. with adhicitta & adhisīla Vin.I,70; D.I,174; III,219 (°sikkhā); A.I,240; II,92 sq., 239; III,106 sq., 327; IV,360; Nd¹ 39 (id.); Ps.I,20, 25 sq., 45 sq., 169; II,11, 244; Pug.61. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】较高的智慧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhippagharati: {'def': '[adhi + ppa + gharati] to flow, to trickle ThA.284. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhippeta: {'def': '[Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for; cp. adhippāya] 1. desired, approved of, agreeable D.I,120; II,236; VvA.312, 315. -- 2. meant, understood, intended as J.III,263; PvA.9, 80, 120, 164. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi 在…上+ppa+i，梵 abhipreta),【过分】1.已需要(desired)，已证实(approved of)，符合的(agreeable)。2.已意图(meant)，已了解(understood)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for; cp. Adhippāya), 1.欲望、认同(desired, approved of, agreeable)。2.意谓、意图(meant, understood, intended as.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已意谓，已有意，已需要。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhippetatta: {'def': '(abstr. fr. adhippeta), ,【中】意谓的事实(the fact of being meant or understood as, in Abl. °ā with reference to, as is to be understood of.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. adhippeta] the fact of being meant or understood as, in Abl. °ā with reference to, as is to be understood of VvA.13; PvA.52. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhippāgā: {'def': '3 sg. aor. of adhippagacchati to go to J.V,59. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhippāya: {'def': '【阳】意图。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+pāya前往),【阳】1.意图、欲求(intention, wish, desire); (-adhippāya) desiring (hassadhippāya in play = khiḍḍatthika). 2. 意趣，结论，推论(sense, meaning, conclusion, inference) (cp. adhigama). --adhippāyena (Instr.) in the way of, like. A.6.52./III,363.︰“Khattiyā bho Gotama, kiṁ-adhippāyā, kiṁ-upavicārā, kiṁ-adhiṭṭhānā, kiṁ-abhinivesā, kiṁpariyosānā”ti? “Khattiyā kho, brāhmaṇa, bhogādhippāyā paññūpavicārā balādhiṭṭhānā pathavībhinivesā issariyapariyosānā”ti.(尊者瞿昙！刹帝利有何之欲求，有何之近行，有何之所托，有何之思慕，有何之究竟耶？)(婆罗门！刹帝利者欲求财物，以慧为近行，以军为所托，由地而起取著，以掌权为究竟。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[adhi + ppa + i; Sk. abhiprāya] 1. intention, wish, desire S.I,124; V,108; A.II,81; III,363 (bhoga°); V,65; J.I,79, 83; Sdhp.62. As adj. (-°) desiring PvA.226 (hass° in play = khiḍḍatthika). -- 2. sense, meaning, conclusion, inference (cp. adhigama) Miln.148; PvA.8, 16, 48, 131 (the moral of a story). --adhippāyena (Instr.) in the way of, like PvA.215 (kīḷ for fun). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhippāyosa: {'def': '[adhi + pāyosa] distinction, difference, peculiarity, special meaning M I 46; S.III,66; IV,208; A.I,267; IV,158; V,48 sq. (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhipāta: {'def': '【阳】破坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [adhipāteti] splitting, breaking, only in phrase muddhā° head-splitting Sn.988 sq., 1004, 1025 (v. l. Nd² °vipāta). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】破坏。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [from adhipatati = Sk. atipatati, to fly past, flit] a moth Sn.964. Expl^d. at Nd¹ 484 as “adhipātikā ti tā uppatitvā khādanti taṁkāraṇā a. vuccanti”; Ud.72 (expl^d. by C. as salabhā). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhipātaka: {'def': '【阳】蠹，蛾，飞蛾，蚱蜢，蝗虫。adhipātikā,【阴】跳蚤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蠹，蛾，蚱蜢，蝗虫。 adhipātikā,【阴】跳蚤。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhipāteti: {'def': '(adhi + pat + e), 破坏，毁。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+pat落下+e), 破坏，毁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. fr. adhipatati, cp. Sk. abhipātayati & P. atipāteti] to break, split J.IV,337 (= chindati). At Ud.8 prob. to be read adhibādheti (v. l. avibādeti. T. adhipāteti). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhipāṭimokkha: {'def': '(nt.) [adhi + pāṭimokkha] the higher, moral, code Vin.V,1 (pāṭim° +); M.II,245 (+ ajjhājīva). (Page 29)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhiroha: {'def': '[fr. adhi + ruh] ascent, ascending; in dur° hard to ascend Miln.322. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhirohanī: {'def': '【阴】梯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】梯。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhisayana: {'def': '(nt.-adj.) [fr. adhiseti] lying on or in, inhabiting PvA.80 (mañcaṁ). (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhisayita: {'def': '[pp. of adhiseti] sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin.III,3; S.III,153. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhiseti: {'def': '(adhi + si + e), 躺着在。 adhisesi, 【过】。 adhisayita, 【过分】。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+si眠﹑卧+e), 躺著。adhisesi,【过】。adhisayita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[adhi + seti] to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue Dh.41; Sn.671 (= gacchati C.) -- pp. adhisayita. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhisīla: {'def': '(nt.) [adhi + sīla] higher morality, usually in threefold set of adhicitta-sikkha, adhipaññā° adhisïla° Vin.I,70; D.I,174; III,219; A.III,133; IV,25; DhA.I,334; PvA.207. See also adhicitta, sikkhā & sīla. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】较高的道德。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】较高的道德。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhivacana: {'def': '(adhi上等+vacana言词) ,【中】上等言词，术语(term)，标明(designation)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】术语，标明。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [adhi + vacana] designation, term, attrîbute, metaphor, metaphorical expression D.II,62; M.I,113, 144, 460; A.II,70, 124; III,310; IV,89, 285, 340; It.15, 114; Sn.p. 218; J.I,117; Nd² 34 = Dhs.1306 (= nāma saṅkhā paññatti etc.); Vbh.6; PvA.63. See on term Dhs. trsl. 340.

--patha “process of synonymous nomenclature” (Mrs. Rh. D.) D.II,68; S.III,71; Dhs.1306; DhsA.51. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivara: {'def': '(adj.) [adhi + vara] superb, excellent, surpassing Vv 16³ (an° unsurpassed, unrivalled; VvA.80 = adhika, visiṭṭha). (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivasati: {'def': '(adhi + vas + a), 居住于，住在。 adhivasi, 【过】。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+vas滞留+a), 居住於，住在。adhivasi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhivattati: {'def': '[adhi + vattati] to come on, proceed, issue, result S.I,101; A.II,32. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi 在…上+vattati发生), ,发生在…上，击败(overpower)。adhivatti,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhi + vat + a), 击败。 adhivatti, 【过】。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhivattha: {'def': '【形】居住於，住在。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of adhivasati] inhabiting, living in (c. Loc.) Vin.I,28; S.I,197; J.I,223; II,385; III,327; PvA.17. The form adhivuttha occurs at J.VI,370. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】居住于，住在。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhivimokkhatta: {'def': '(nt.) = adhimokkha; being inclined to DhsA.261. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivimuttatta: {'def': '(nt.) = adhivimokkhatta & adhimutti, i. e. propensity, the fact of being inclined or given to J.V,254 (T. kāmādhivimuttitā, v. l. °muttata). (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivuttha: {'def': 'adhivattha, (adhivasati‘滞留在…上’的【过分】)滞留在…上。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhivasati 的【过分】)。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see adhivattha. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivutti: {'def': '﹐(adhi+vutti,‹adhi+vac, cp.Sk.abhivadati) 【阴】表达(expression)，说(saying)，意见(opinion)。adhivuttipada (=adhivacana-pada DA I.103)﹐深解语句(statements of doctrine)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [adhi + vutti, fr. adhi + vac, cp. Sk. abhivadati] expression, saying, opinion; only in tt. adhivuttipada (v. l. adhimutti-p. at all passages) D.I,13 (expl^d. by adhivacana-pada DA.I,103); M.II,228; A.V,36. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivāha: {'def': '[fr. adhi + vah; cp. Sk. abhivahati] a carrier, bearer, adj. bringing S.IV,70 (dukkha°); A.I,6; Th.1, 494. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivāhana: {'def': '(fr. adhi + vah),【中】【形】携带，运送(carrying, bringing, bearing Sn.79);【阴】ādhivāhanī(Th.1, 519.)。yogakkhemādhivāhana, 瑜伽运安稳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.-adj.) [fr. adhi + vah] carrying, bringing, bearing Sn.79; f. °ī Th.1, 519. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivāsa: {'def': '[fr. adhi + vas] endurance, forbearance, holding out; only as adj. in dur° difficult to hold out Th.1, 111. Adhivāsaka (& °ika) (adj.) [fr. adhivāsa] willing, agreeable, enduring, patient Vin.IV,130; M.I,10, 526; A.II,118; III,163; V,132; J.III,369 (an°); IV,11, 77. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivāsaka: {'def': '【形】持久的;病人,.(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】持久的；病人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhivāsana: {'def': '(参考 [adhivāseti使之滞留在…上?同意] ),【中】同意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nṭ.) [fr. adhi + vas] 1 assent A.III,31; DhA.I,33. -- 2. forbearance, endurance M.I,10; J.II,237; III,263; IV,307; V,174. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivāsanatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. adhivāsana] patience, endurance, Dhs.1342; Vbh.360 (an°). (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhivāsanā: {'def': '【阴】坚忍，耐心。adhivāsanakkhanti，坚忍与耐心。adhivāsana, adhivāsanā,【梵】坚忍，安受，忍受。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】忍耐，耐心。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhivāseti: {'def': '(adhi + vas + e), 1. 忍耐。 2. 等候。 adhivāesi, 【过】。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of adhivasati, cp. BSk. adhivāsayati in meaning of 3] 1. to wait for (c. Acc.) J.I,254; II,352; III,277. -- 2. to have patience, bear, endure (c. Acc.) D.II,128, 157; J.I,46; III,281 (pahāre); IV,279, 407; V,51, 200; VvA.336, 337. -- 3. to consent, agree, give in Vin.I,17; D.I,109 (cp. DA.I,277); S.IV,76; DhA.I,33; PvA.17, 20, 75 and freq. passim. -- Caus. adhivāsāpeti to cause to wait J.I,254. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+vāseti使…滞留), 1.等候(使之滞留在…上)。2.同意。【过】adhivāesi。【3.单.过】ajjhavāsayi, ajjhavasāyi。【3.单.命】adhivāsetu。(BPA译 1.consent to sojourn 2.consent)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhiyita: {'def': 'see adhīyati. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhiṭṭhaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. adhiṭṭhāti] bent on, given to, addicted to J.V,427 (surā°). (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhiṭṭhita: {'def': '(adhiṭṭhāti 的【过分】﹐梵adhisṭhita) 决定，承担，加持，摄受，护念( standing on, looked after, managed, undertaken, governed, undertaking, bent on)。svādhiṭṭhita(su+adhiṭṭhita)﹐善摄受。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of adhiṭṭhāti] 1. standing on (c. Loc.), esp. with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 63³⁰ (hemarathe a. = sakalaṁ ṭhānaṁ abhibhavitvā ṭhita VvA.269). -- (a) looked after, managed, undertaken, governed Vin.I,57; S.V,278 (sv’âdhiṭṭhita); PvA.141 (kammanta). -- (b) undertaking, bent on (c. Acc.) Sn.820 (ekacariyaṁ). (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhiṭṭhāti 的【过分】), 决定，承担。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhiṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】决定，决议，决心。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. adhi + sthā] 1. decision, resolution, self-determination, will (cp. on this meaning Cpd. 62) D.III,229 (where 4 are enum^d., viz. paññā°, sacca° cāga° upasama°); J.I,23; V,174; Ps.I,108; II,171 sq., 207; DhsA.166 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 44). -- 2. mentioned in bad sense with abhinivesa and anusaya, obstinacy, prejudice and bias M.I,136; III,31, 240; S.II,17; III,10, 135, 194. -- As adj. (-°) applying oneself to, bent on A.III,363. -- 3. looking after, management, direction, power Miln.309 (devānaṁ); PvA.141 (so read for adhitaṭṭhāna). [adiṭṭhāna as PvA.89, used as explanatory for āvāsa, should perhaps be read adhiṭṭhāna in the sense of fixed, permanent, abode]. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹adhi在…上+sthā站立?存续?停止),【中】立足，决定，决议，决心(decision, resolution, aspiration, self determination, will)。adhiṭṭhānavasitā﹐决意(住定)自在，入定的时间能够依自己的意愿而决定。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '决定、决意、受持、依处、摄持', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Adhiṭṭhātabba: {'def': '【潜】适合决定的。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【义】适合决定的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhiṭṭhāti: {'def': 'adhiṭṭhahati, (adhi + ṭhā + a), 站稳，决定，专心。 adhiṭṭhāsi,adhiṭṭhahi, 【过】。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'adhiṭṭhahati(adhi在…上+ṭhā站立?存续+a),(Sk. adhitisṭhati, adhi + sthā), 站稳，决定，守住，坚持。adhiṭṭhāsi, adhiṭṭhahi,【过】。adhiṭṭhāya,【义】。adhiṭṭhātabba,【未被】。adhiṭṭhahitvā,【独】。adhiṭṭheti, 【使】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhiṭṭhahati) [Sk. adhitiṣṭhati, adhi + sthā] 1. to stand on J.III,278 (ger. °āya); DhA.IV,183 (ger. °hitvā); fig. to insist on Th.1, 1131 (aor. °āhi). -- 2. to concentrate or fix one’s attention on (c. Acc.), to direct one’s thoughts to, to make up one’s mind, to wish Vin.I,115 (inf. °ṭhātuṁ), 297 (id.), 125 (grd. °ṭhātabba) J.I,80 (aor. °ahi); III,278; IV,134 (v. l. ati° C. expl^s. abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati); DhA.I,34; IV,201 (ger. °hitvā); PvA.23 (aor. °ṭhāsi) 171 (id.), 75 (ger. °hitvā). On adhiṭṭheyya see Cpd. 209, n. 2; 219, n. 1. -- 3. to undertake, practice, perform, look after, to celebrate S.II,17; A.I,115 sq.; J.I,50; PvA.209 (ger. °ṭhāya). -- pp. adhiṭṭhita (q. v.). (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhiṭṭhāya: {'def': '(adhiṭṭhāti 的【独】)。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '([adhiṭṭhāti决定] 的【独】) 决定。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhiṭṭhāyaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma° Mhvs 5, 175; 30, 98; kammanta° DhA.I,393. (Page 28)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】指挥，照顾。【阳】监督人。(p12)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】指挥，照顾。【阳】监督人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adho: {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic adhaḥ; compar. adharaḥ = Lat. inferus, Goth. undar, E. under, Ind. * n̊dher-; superl. adhamaḥ = Lat. infimus] below, usually comb^d. or contrasted with uddhaṁ “above” and tiriyaṁ “across”, describing the 3 dimensions. -- uddhaṁ and adho above and below, marking zenith & nadir. Thus with uddhaṁ and the 4 bearings (disā) and intermediate points (anudisā) at S.I,122; III,124; A.IV,167; with uddhaṁ & tiriyaṁ at Sn.150, 537, 1055, 1068. Expl^d. at KhA 248 by heṭṭhā and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd² 155. For further ref. see uddhaṁ. The comp^n. form of adho before vowels is adh°.

--akkhaka beneath the collar-bone Vin.IV,213. --agga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth) J v.156 (+ uddh° expl^d. by uparima-danta C.). --kata turned down, or upside down J.I,20; VI,298. --gata gone by, past. Adv. °ṁ since (cp. uddhaṁ adv. later or after) J.VI,187 (ito māsaṁ adhogataṁ since one month ago). --gala (so read for T. udho°) down the throat PvA.104. --mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin.II,78; M.I,132, 234: Vv 16¹ (= heṭṭhā mukha VvA.78). --bhāga the lower part (of the body) M.I,473; DhA.I,148. --virecana action of a purgative (opp. uddha° of an emetic) D.I,12; DA.I,98 (= adho dosānaṁ nīharaṇaṁ); DhsA.404. --sākhaṁ (+ uddhamūlaṁ) branches down (& roots up, i. e. uprooted) DhA.I,75. --sira (adj.) head downward J.IV,194. --siraṁ (adv.) with bowed head (cp. avaṁsiraṁ) J.VI,298 (= siraṁ adhokatvā heṭṭhāmukho C.). --sīsa (adj.) head first, headlong J.I,233; v.472 (°ka). (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'adhas,【副】向下(below, uddhaṁ “above” and tiriyaṁ “across”)。【无】在…之下，在…下面。adhokata,【形】降低，转下(turned down, or upside down)。adhogama,【形】下去。adhobhāga(身体的下部),【阳】较低(下)的部份。adhomukha,【形】弯腰，脸向下，颠倒转。Thus with uddhaṁ and the 4 bearings (disā) and intermediate points (anudisā) at S.I,122; III.124; A.IV,167; with uddhaṁ & tiriyaṁ at Sn.150, 537, 1055, 1068. Expld. at KhA 248 by heṭṭhā and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd2 155. For further ref. see uddhaṁ. The compn. form of adho before vowels is adh°.%b\xa0\xa0adhakkhaka锁骨以下(beneath the collar-bone Vin.IV,213. adhagga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth) J v.156 (+ uddh° expld. by uparima-danta C.). adhagata gone by, past. Adv. °ṁ since (cp. uddhaṁ adv. later or after) J.VI.187 (ito māsaṁ adhogataṁ since one month ago). adhagala (so read for T. udho°) down the throat PvA.104. adhamukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin.II,78; M.I,132, 234: Vv 161 (= heṭṭhā mukha VvA.78). adhavirecana action of a purgative (opp. uddha° of an emetic) D.I,12; DA.I,98 (= adho dosānaṁ nīharaṇaṁ); DhsA.404. adhasākhaṁ (+ uddhamūlaṁ) branches down (& roots up, i. e. uprooted) DhA.I,75. adhasira (adj.) head downward J.IV.194. adhasiraṁ (adv.) with bowed head (cp. avaṁsiraṁ) J.VI.298 (= siraṁ adhokatvā heṭṭhāmukho C.). adhasīsa (adj.) head first, headlong J.I.233; v.472 (°ka).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】在…之下，在…下面。 ~kata,【形】降低，转下。 ~gama,【形】下去。~bhāga,【阳】较低的部份。 ~mukha,【形】弯腰，脸向下，颠倒转。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adhovirecana: {'def': '(adho向下+virecana泻药)﹐【中】向下泻药。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhunā: {'def': '【副】现在，最近，崭新。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic adhunā] just now, quite recently D.II,208; Vin.II,185 (kālakata); Miln.155; Dāvs II,94.

--āgata a new comer M.I,457; J.II,105. --âbhisitta newly or just anointed D.II,227. --uppanna just arisen D.II,208, 221. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】现在，最近，崭新。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhura: {'def': '(nt.) [a + dhura, see dhura 2] irresponsibility, indifference to oblihations J.IV,241. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhuva: {'def': 'Addhuva (a无+dhuva永久),【形】无永久。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adhīna: {'def': '【形】依靠的，依赖的，隶属。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】依靠的，依赖的，属于。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [cp. Sk. adhīna] subject, dependent D.I,72 (atta° & para°); J.IV,112; DA.I,217; also written ādhīna J.V,350. See also under para. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adhīyati: {'def': 'adhiyati, ( [adhi在…上+i去] 的【反照】), 学习，用功学习。adhīyi,【过】。adhīta,【过分】。adhicca,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& adhiyati [Med. of adhi + i, 1^st sg. adhīye taken as base in Pāli] to study, lit. to approach (cp. adhigacchati); to learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin.I,270; S.I,202 (dhammapadāni); J.IV,184 (adhīyitvā), 496 (adhīyamāna); VI,458; DhA.III,446 (adhīyassu). -- ger. adhīyitvā J.IV,75; adhiyānaṁ J.V,450 (= sajjhāyitvā C.) & adhicca: see adhicca 2; pp. adhiyita D.I,96. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi + ī + ya), 学习，用功学习。 adhīyi, 【过】。 adhīta, 【过分】。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adinna: {'def': '【形】未给的。 Adinnādāna, 【中】窃盗。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(a未+dinna给与【过分】),【形】【副】未给的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pp.) [a + dinna] that which is not given, freq. in phrase adinn’ādāna (BSk. adattādāna Divy 302) seizing or grasping that whieh is not given to one, i. e. stealing, is the 2^nd of the ten qualifications of bad character or sīla (dasa-sīla see sīla II,). Vin.I,83 (°ā veramaṇī); D.I,4 (= parassa haraṇaṁ theyyaṁ corikā ti vuttaṁ hoti DA.I,71); III,68 sq., 82, 92, 181 sq.; M.I,361; It.63; Kh II,, cp. KhA 26. -- adinnādāyin he who takes what is not given, a thief; stealing, thieving (cp. BSK. adattādāyika Divy 301, 418) Vin.I,85; D.I,138; Sdhp.78. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adinnādāna: {'def': '(adinna未给与【过分】+ādāna拿起【中】),【中】窃盗(拿起未被给与者)。Pārā.III,46.︰Adinnaṁ nāmaṁ yaṁ adinnaṁ anissaṭṭhaṁ apariccattaṁ rakkhitaṁ gopitaṁ mamāyitaṁ parapariggahitaṁ. Etaṁ adinnaṁ nāma. (不给予︰凡是不给予，非舍弃物，非永远舍弃物，被守护之物，被人珍爱，他人所有物，此称为「不给予」。) KhA.34.︰Adinnādānā veramaṇiyā mahaddhanatā pahūtadhanadhaññatā anantabhogatā anuppannabhoguppattitā uppannabhogathāvaratā icchitānaṁ bhogānaṁ khippappaṭilābhitā rājacorudakaggi-appiyadāyādehi asādhāraṇabhogatā asādhāraṇadhanappaṭilābhitā lokuttamatā natthikabhāvassa ajānanatā sukhavihāritāti evamādīni.(离不与取：大财富，财、谷丰富，无量财产，生出未起的财产，已生起的财产坚固，所欲之财迅速获得，财产不与王、贼、水、火、不喜的继承者所共，得不共财，世间最上〔首领〕，无所不知，乐住，如此等(果)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adinnādāyin: {'def': '(adinna未给与【过分】+ādāyin拿起【形】),【形】拿起未被给与者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Adissamāna: {'def': '【形】见不到的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】见不到的。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adiṭṭha: {'def': '(a未+diṭṭha见【过分】),【形】未见的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】未看的。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adiṭṭhā: {'def': '[a + diṭṭhā, ger. of *dassati] not seeing, without seeing J.IV,192 (T. adaṭṭhā, v. l. BB na diṭṭhā, C. adisvā); V,219. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adrūbhaka: {'def': 'see dubbha. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adu: {'def': '【中】（属于 amu 的），某某东西。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】(属於 amu 的)，某某东西。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(or ādu) (indecl.) [perhaps identical with aduṁ, nt. of pron. asu] part. of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic exclamations Vv 62² (= udāhu VvA.258; v. l. SS. ādu) = Pv IV.3¹⁷ (ādu) = DhA.I,31 (T. ādu, v. l. adu); Vv 63¹ (v. l. ādu); J.V,330 (T. ādu, C. adu; expl^d. on p. 331 fantastically as aduñ ca aduñ ca kammaṁ karohī ti). See also ādu. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aduṁ: {'def': 'nt. of pron. asu. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Advaya: {'def': '(a无+dvaya二重),【形】无二重(ㄔㄨㄥˊ)、无两种。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Advejjha: {'def': '【形】无疑的，确定的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无疑的，确定的。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Advejjhatā: {'def': 'see dvejjhatā. (Page 27)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adāsa: {'def': '[prob. = adaṁsa, from ḍasati to bite, cp. dāṭhā tooth; lit meaning “toothless” or “not biting”] a kind of bird J.IV,466. (Page 25)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adūbhaka: {'def': '【形】不奸诈的，靠得住的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不奸诈的，靠得住的。(p11)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Adūsaka: {'def': '(adj.) [a + dūsaka] innocent J.V,143 (= nirapa‹-› rādha C.); VI,84, 552. f. adūsikā Sn.312. (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Adūsiya: {'def': '= adūsaka J.V,220 (= anaparādha C.). (Page 26)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aga: {'def': '【阳】 1. 山。2. 树。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.山。2.树。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agada: {'def': '[Vedic agada; a + gada] medicine, drug, counterpoison J.I,80 (°harīṭaka); Miln.121, 302, 319, 334; DA.I,67; DhA.I,215; PvA.198 (= osadhaṁ). (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic agada; a + gada),【中】阿伽陀药(medicine, drug)，解毒药(counterpoison)。agadaharīṭaka﹐诃子药。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】药。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Agalu: {'def': '[cp. Sk. aguru, which is believed to appear in Hebr. ahālīm (aloe), also in Gr. a)lόh & a)gaλloxon] fragrant aloe wood, Agallochum Vv 53⁷ (aggalu = VvA.237 agalugandha); VvA.158 (+ candana). Cp. also Av. Ś I.24, and akalu. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】沉香。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. aguru),【阳】沉香。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agaru: {'def': '【形】 1. 不重的。2. 不麻烦的。【阳】沉香（印度产的瑞香料沉香树 (Aquilariaagallocha) 的芳香性的、树脂质的木材，用作东方烧香的香料）。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. aguru, a + garu] (a) not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru “if it does not inconvenience you, if you don’t mind” (cp. BSk. yadi te aguru. Av. S.I,94, 229; II,90) Vin. I.25; IV,17, D.I,51; DhA.I,39. -- (b) disrespectful, irreverent (against = Gen.) D.I,89; Sn.p. 51. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐aguru﹐(Sk. aguru；a-不+garu重ㄓㄨㄥˋ),【形】1.不重的。2.不麻烦的。【阳】沉香(顶级的香料，沉香树(Aquilaria agallocha, Agarwood) 的芳香性的、树脂质的木材，东方人用作烧香的香料。产地：越南、柬埔寨、缅甸、寮国、马来西亚、印尼、巴布辛西几内亚、中国的海南岛)。沉香别名：乌沉、水沉、奇楠沉、伽罗香、蜜香、黄熟香、栈香、木榓、木蜜、阿伽罗香、阿伽嚧、恶揭噜、阿伽楼。在中国医学中，沉香是味卒温，进入胃和肾，有降气、纳肾、平肝、壮阳的作用，主治胸腹、呕吐、平胃、平哮喘、治小便闭塞，此外，还有痛安神的作用。对於强化心脏及神经具有疗效，沉香帮助睡眠、养颜美容、消胀气、排宿便、去油脂，有好的提阳功效。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agata: {'def': '(a未+gata去【过分】) 【过分】未去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agati: {'def': '【阴】 1. 迷途。 2. 偏见。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see gati. --°gamana practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing D.III,228 (4: chanda°, dosa° moha° bhaya°); A.II,18 sq., J.IV,402; V,98, 510; PvA.161. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】迷途。agatigamana﹐误入歧途(practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agga: {'def': '【形】最高的，顶端。【阳】顶，端。~tā,【阴】 ~tta,【中】前显赫，给予社会中有突出表现者的奖励。~phala,【中】 1. 第一次的种植收成。2. 阿罗汉圣果的上果位。~magga,【阳】最高的解脱道。~mahesī,【阴】皇后。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (adj. n.) [Vedic agra; cp. Av. agrō first; Lith. agrs early] 1. (adj;) (a.) of time: the first, foremost Dpvs.IV,13 (saṅgahaṁ first collection). See cpds. -- (b.) of space: the highest, topmost, J.I,52 (°sākhā). -- (c.) of quality: illustricus, excellent, the best, highest, chief Vin.IV,232 (agga-m-agga) most excellent, D.II,4: S.I,29 (a. sattassa Sambuddha); A.II,17 = Pv IV.3⁴⁷ (lokassa Buddho aggo [A: aggaṁ] pavuccati); It.88, 89; Sn.875 (suddhi); PvA.5. Often comb^d. with seṭṭha (best), e. g. D.II,15; S.III,83, 264. -- 2. (nt.) top, point. (a.) lit.: the top or tip (nearly always --°); as ār° point of an awl Sn.625, 631; Dh.401; kus° tip of a blade of grass Dh.70; Sdhp.349; tiṇ° id PvA.241; dum° top of a tree J.II,155; dhaj° of a banner S.I,219; pabbat° of a mountain Sdhp.352; sākh° of a branch PvA.157; etc. -- (b.) fig. the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place, often to be trsl. as adj. the highest, best of all etc. S.II,29 (aggena aggassa patti hoti: only the best attain to the highest); Mhvs 7, 26. Usually as --°; e. g. dum° the best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 35⁴¹ (cp. VvA.161); dhan° plenty D.III,164; madhur° S.I,41, 161, 237; bhav° the best existence S.III,83; rūp° extraordinary beauty J.I,291; lābh° highest gain J.III,127; sambodhi-y-agga highest wisdom Sn.693 (= sabbaññuta-ñāṇan SnA 489; the best part or quality of anything, in enumⁿ of the five “excellencies” of first-fruits (panca aggāni, after which the N. Pañcaggadāyaka), viz. khettaggan rās° koṭṭh° kumbhi° bhojan° SnA 270. sukh° perfect bliss Sdhp.243. Thus freq. in phrase aggaṁ akkhāyati to deserve or receive the highest praise, to be the most excellent D.I,124; S.III,156, 264; A.II,17 (Tathāgato); It.87 (id.); Nd² 517 D (appamādo); Miln.183. -- 3. Cases as adv.: aggena (Instr.) in the beginning, beginning from, from (as prep.), by (id.) Vin.II,167. (aggena gaṇhāti to take from, to subtract, to find the difference; Kern Toev. s. v. unnecessarily changes aggena into agghena), 257 (yadaggena at the moment when or from, foll. by tad eva “then”; cp. agge), 294 (bhikkh° from alms); Vbh.423 (vass° by the number of years). aggato (Abl.) in the beginning Sn.217 (+ majjhato, sesato). aggato kata taken by its worth, valued, esteemed Th.2, 386, 394. agge (loc) 1. at the top A.II,201 (opp. mūle at the root); J.IV,156 (id.); Sn.233 (phusit° with flowers at the top: supupphitaggasākhā KhA 192); J.II,153 (ukkh°); III,126 (kūp°). -- 2 (as prep.) from. After, since, usually in phrases yad° (foll. by tad°) from what time, since what date D.I,152; II,206; & ajja-t-agge from this day, after today D.I,85; M.I,528; A.V,300; Sn.p. 25 (cp. BSk. adyāgrena Av. Ś II.13); at the end: bhattagge after a meal Vin.II,212.

--aṅgulī the main finger, i. e. index finger J.VI,404. --āsana main seat DA.I,267. --upaṭṭhāka chief personal attendant D.II,6. --kārikā first taste, sample Vin.III,80. --kulika of an esteemed clan Pv III,5⁵ (= seṭṭh° PvA.199). --ñña recognized as primitive primeval, D.III,225 (porāṇa +), A.II,27 sq.; IV,246, Kvu 341. --danta one who is most excellently self-restrained (of the Buddha) Th.I,354. --dāna a splendid gift Vin.III,39. --dvāra main door J.I,114. --nakha tip of the nail Vin.IV,221. --nagara the first or most splendid of cities Vin.I,229. --nikkhitta highly praised or famed Miln.343. --nikkhittaka an original depository of the Faith Dpvs.IV,5. --pakatimant of the highest character J.V,351 (= aggasabhāva). --patta having attained perfection D.III,48 sq. --pasāda the highest grace A.II,34; It.87. --piṇḍa the best oblation or alms.I,141; M.I,28; II,204. --piṇḍika receiving the best oblations J.VI,140. --puggala the best of men (of the Buddha) Sn.684; DhA.II,39; Sdhp. 92, 558. --purohita chief or prime minister J.VI,391. --phala the highest or supreme fruit (i. e. Arahantship) J.I,148; Pv.IV,1⁸⁸; PvA.230. --bīja having eggs from above (opp. mūla°), i. e. propagated by slips or cuttings D.I,5; DA.I,81. --magga (adj.) having reached the top of the path, i. e. Arahantship ThA.20. --mahesi the king’s chief wife, queen-consort J.I,262; III,187, 393; V,88; DhA.I,199; PvA.76. --rājā the chief king J.VI,391; Miln.27. --vara most meritorious, best Dpvs VI,68. --vāda the original doctrine (= theravāda) Dpvs.IV,13. --vādin one who proclaims the highest good (of the Buddha) Th.1, 1142. (Page 4)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) (only --°) [a contracted form of agāra] a (small) house, housing, accomodation; shelter, hut; hall. dān° a house of donation, i. e. a public or private house where alms are given J.III,470; IV,379, 403; VI,487; PvA.121; Miln.2. salāk° a hut where food is distributed to the bhikkhus by tickets, a food office J.I,123, VvA.75. (Page 4)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '-agga,(Vedic agra),【形】最高的，顶端。【阳】1.顶，端。2.【介】(agge),从…起。aggatā,【阴】aggatta,【中】前显赫，给予社会中有突出表现者的奖励(pre-eminence)。aggaphala,【中】1.第一次的种植收成。2.阿罗汉圣果的上果位。aggamagga(agga+m+agga),【阳】最优异的(most excellent)。aggamahesī,【阴】皇后。kusagga﹐tiṇagga﹐叶端(tip of a blade of grass)。dumagga, 树顶(top of a tree, the best of trees, an excellent tree)。dhajagga, 旗顶(of a banner); pabbatagga, 山顶(of a mountain)。sākhagga, 枝头(of a branch); dhanagga, plenty; madhuragga; bhavagga, the best existence; rūpagga extraordinary beauty; lābhagga, highest gain。sambodhi-y-agga,一切知智(highest wisdom, = sabbaññuta-ñāṇaṁ)。ajja-t-agge(ajja-t-agge),从今以后(from this day, after today (cp. BSk. adyāgrena))。bhattagge,饭后(after a meal)。aggangulī,(the main finger, i. e. index finger)。aggāsana,最上座(main seat)。aggupaṭṭhāka,首席(chief personal attendant)。aggakārikā,最上味(first taste, sample)。aggakulika,最高评价的家族(of an esteemed clan (=seṭṭhagga)。aggañña recognized as primitive primeval, (porāṇa +). aggadanta,最上调御(one who is most excellently self-restrained (of the Buddha))。aggadāna,最上的布施(a splendid gift)。aggadvāra,大门(main door)。agganakha,指甲端(tip of the nail)。agganagara,首善城市( the first or most splendid of cities)。agganikkhitta,最高的赞美(highly praised or fame)。agganikkhittaka,最上座(an original depository of the Faith。aggapakatimant,最高的特色(of the highest character (= aggasabhāva))。aggapatta,证得最高(having attained perfection)。aggapasāda,最高的信心( the highest grace)。aggapiṇḍa,最上的奉献或托钵(the best oblation or alms)。aggapiṇḍika,最上的奉献(receiving the best oblations)。aggapuggala,最上人(the best of men (of the Buddha))。aggapurohita,首相(chief or prime minister)。aggaphala,最上果(the highest or supreme fruit (i. e. arahantship))。aggamagga,最上道(adj.) having reached the top of the path, i.e. arahantship。aggamahesi,王后(the king’s chief wife, queen-consort。aggarājā,首要的国王( the chief king)。aggavara,最优雅( most meritorious, best。aggavāda,最原始教义(the original doctrine (= theravāda))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aggabīja: {'def': '(agga顶尖+bīja种子),【形】以插枝为种子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aggala: {'def': '【中】闩，门闩。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aggalu: {'def': 'see agalu. (Page 4)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aggatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. of agga = Sk. agratvan] the state or condition of being the first, pre-eminence PvA.9, 89. (Page 4)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aggatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. of agga] pre-eminence, prominence, superiority Kvu 556 (°ṁ gata); Dpvs .IV,1 (guṇaggataṁ gatā). -- (adj.) mahaggata of great value or superiority D.I,80; III,224. (Page 4)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aggavant: {'def': '(adj.) occupying the first place, of great eminence A.I,70, 243. (Page 4)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aggañña: {'def': '【形】被认为是最高的或最重要的。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】被认为是最高的或最重要的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aggaḷa: {'def': 'Aggaḷā,(cp. Sk. argala & argalā to *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc.),【阴】1.闩，门闩(a bolt or cross-bar)。2.作为紧缩衣服的一块布条(a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Aggaḷā (f.) (also occasionally with l.) [cp. Sk. argala & argalā to *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc., as in Ags. reced house; *aleg in Sk. rakṣati to protect, Gr. a]lέcw id., Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Gr. a]rkέw = Lat. arceo, Orcus, Ohg rigil bolt.] a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction: 1. a bolt or cross-bar Vin.I,290; D.I,89 (°ṁ ākoteṭi to knock upon the cross-bar; a. = kavāṭa DA.I,252); A.IV,359 (id.); S.IV,290; A.I,101 = 137 = IV,231. (phusit° with fastened bolts, securely shut Th.1,385 (id.); Vin.IV,47; J. V.293 (°ṁ uppīḷeti to lift up the cross-bar. -- 2. a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset Vin.I,290 (+ tunna), 392 (Bdhgh on MV VIII,21, 1); J.I,8 (+ tunna) VI,71 (°ṁ datvā); Vin.IV,121.

--dāna putting in a gusset J.I,8. --phalaka the post or board, in which the cross-bar is fixed (cp. °vaṭṭi) M.III,95. --vaṭṭi = °phalaka Vin.II,120, 148. --sūci bolting pin M.I,126. (Page 4)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aggha: {'def': '【阳】价，值(price, value, worth)。【中】宽待客人的义务。agghakāraka,【阳】评价者，估价者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[see agghati] 1. price, value, worth, Miln.244; Mhvs 26, 22; 30, 76; VvA.77. -- mahaggha (adj.) of great value J.IV,138; V,414; VI,209; Pv.II,1¹⁸. See also mahâraha. appaggha (adj.) of little value J. IV,139; V,414. -- anaggha (nt.) pricelessness, J.V,484; cattari anagghāni the four priceless things, viz. setacchatta, nisīdanapallaṅka, ādhāraka, pādapīṭhikā DhA.III,120, 186. (adj.) priceless, invaluable J.V,414; Mhvs 26, 25; DhA.IV,216. -- agghena (Instr.) for the price of Vin.II,52, cp. Bdhgh on p. 311, 312. -- 2. an oblation made to a guest D.II,240; J.IV,396 = 476.

--kāraka a valuator J.I,124. --pada valuableness J.V,473 (°lakkhaṇaṁ nāma mantaṁ). (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】价，值。【中】宽待客人的义务。 ~kāraka,【阳】评价者，估价者。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Agghaka: {'def': '(adj.) = aggha; worth, having the value of (-°) Mhvs 30, 77. an° priceless Mhvs 30, 72. (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=aggha), agghanaka,【形】(【合】) 有…价值的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'agghanaka,【形】（【合】）有…价值的。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Agghanaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. *agghana, abstr. to agghati] having the value of, equal to, worth Vin.IV,226; J.I,61 (satasahass°), 112; DA.I,80 (kahāpaṇ°); DhA.III,120 (cuddasakoṭi°); Mhvs 26, 22; 34, 87. -- f. °ikā J.I,178 (satasahass°). (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Agghaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [in function & form grd. of agghati] priceless, invaluable, beyond the reach of money Miln.192. (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Agghati: {'def': '(aggh有价值+a；Sk. arghati, argh = arh), 值得。agghi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(aggh + a), 值得。 agghi, 【过】。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(intr.) [Sk. arghati, argh = arh (see arhati), cp. Gr. a]lfή reward, a]lfάnw to deserve] to be worth, to have the value of (Acc.), to deserve J.I,112 (satasahassaṁ; aḍḍhamāsakaṁ); VI,174, 367 (padarajaṁ); DhA.III,35 (maṇin nâgghāma); Mhvs 32, 28. Freq. in stock phrase kalaṁ nâgghati (nâgghanti) soḷasiṁ not to be worth the 16^th part of (cp. kalā) Vin.II,156; S.I,233; Dh.70; Vv 20⁷ (= nânubhoti VvA.104), 43⁷; J.V,284. -- Caus. agghāpeti to value, to appraise, to have a price put on (Acc.) J.I,124; IV,137, 278; Miln.192; Mhvs 27, 23. Cp. agghāpanaka & agghāpaniya. (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Agghika: {'def': 'agghiya,【中】饰有纸带花彩的木柱。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) (-°) [= agghiya] an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning “string, garland” (cp. Sinhalese ägä “festoon work”) Mhvs 19, 38 (pupph°) 34, 73 (ratan°) 34, 76 (dhaj°); Dāvs.I,39 (pupphamay°); V,51 (kusum°). (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'agghiya,【中】饰有纸带花彩的木柱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agghiya: {'def': '(adj. -n.) [grd. form from agghati] 1. (adj.) valuable, precious, worth J.VI,265 (maṇi); DhA.II,41 (ratan° of jewel’s worth); Mhvs 30, 92. -- 2. (nt.) a respectful oblation J.V,324 = VI,516; Dpvs VI,65; VII.4. (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】宽待客人的义务。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】宽待客人的义务。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agghāpana: {'def': '【中】定价，估计。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】定价，估计。agghāpanaka,【阳】估价者。agghāpaniya,【中】要被估计的。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Agghāpanaka: {'def': '[fr. agghāpana to agghāpeti, Caus. of agghati] a valuator, appraiser J.I,124, 125; V,276 (°ika). (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Agghāpaniya: {'def': '(grd. of agghāpeti),【形】【中】要被估计的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of agghāpeti, see agghati] that which is to be valued, in °kamma the business of a valuator J.IV,137. (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aggi: {'def': '(Vedic agni),【阳】火(fire, flames, sparks; conflagration)。aggikkhandha,【阳】火蕴，火海。aggiparicaraṇa,【中】奉火，拜火。aggisālā,【阴】火房，桑那浴室。aggisikhā,【阴】火焰(直译：火顶)。aggihutta,【中】火供。aggiṁ ujjāleti, aggiṁ jāleti,点火(kindle, make burn)。agyantarāyo,火难(火灾)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic agni = Lat. ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi we find the diaeretic forms gini (q. v.) and aggini (see below)] fire. -- 1. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration, Vin.II,120 (fire in bathroom); M.I,487 (anāhāro nibbuto f. gone out for lack of fuel); S.IV,185, 399 (sa-upādāno jalati provided with fuel blazes); Sn.62; Dh.70 (= asaniaggi DhA.III,71); J.I,216 (sparks), 294 (pyre); II,102; III,55; IV,139; VvA.20 (aggimhi tāpanaṁ + udake temanaṁ). -- The var. phases of lighting and extinguishing the fire are given at A.IV,45: aggiṁ ujjāleti (kindle, make burn), ajjhupekkhati (look after, keep up), nibbāpeti (extinguish, put out), nikkhipati (put down, lay). Other phrases are e. g. aggiṁ jāleti (kindle) J.II,44; gaṇhāti (make or take) J.I,494 (cp. below b); deti (set light to) J.I,294; nibbāpeti (put out) It.93; Sdhp.552. aggi nibbāyati the f. goes out S.II,85; M.I,487; J.I,212 (udake through water); Miln.304. aggi nibbuto the f. is extinguished (cp. °nibbāna) J.I,61; Miln.304. agginā dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to A.I,136, 199; PvA.20. udar° the fire supposed to regulate digestion PvA.33; cp. Dial. II.208, note 2; kapp°uṭṭhān° the universal conflagration J.III,185; dāv° a wood or jungle fire J.I,212; naḷ° the burning of a reed J.VI,100; padīp° fire of a lamp Miln.47. 2. the sacrificial fire: In one or two of the passages in the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire-god. But the commentators do not think so, and the Jātaka commentary, when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagavā the Lord Agni, e. g. at J.I,285, 494; II,44. The ancient ceremony of kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that commentary e. g. J.I,285; II,43. Aggiṁ paricarati (cp. °paricāriyā) to serve the sacred fire Vin.I,31 (jaṭilā aggī paricaritukāmā); A.V,263, 266; Th.2, 143 (= aggihuttaṁ paric° ThA.136); Dh.107; J.I,494; DhA.II,232. aggiṁ juhati (cp. °homa, °hutta) to sacrifice (in)to the fire A.II,207; often comb^d. with aggihuttaṁ paricarati, e. g. S.I,166; Sn.p. 79. aggiṁ namati & santappeti to worship the fire A.V,235. aggissa (Gen.) paricāriko J YI.207 (cp. below °paricārika); aggissa ādhānaṁ A.IV,41. -- 3. (ethical, always --°) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Freq. in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rāg°, dos°, moh°, or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At S.IV,19; A.IV,41 sq. there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are āhuneyy°, gahapat°, dakkhiṇeyy°, kaṭṭh°. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at the basis of Buddhist ethics, & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. D.III,217; It.92, Vbh.368. In late books are found others: ind° the fire of the senses PvA.56; dukkh° the glow of suffering ib. 60; bhavadukkh° of the misery of becomings Sdhp. 552; vippaṭisār° burning remorse PvA.60; sok° burning grief ib. 41.

Note. The form aggini occurs only at Sn.668 & 670 in the meaning of “pyre”, and in comb^n. with sama ”like”, viz. aggini-samaṁ jalitaṁ 668 (= samantato jali taṁ aggiṁ SnA.480); aggini-samāsu 670 (= aggisamāsu SnA.481). The form agginī in phrase niccagginī can either be referred to gini (q. v.) or has to be taken as Nom. of aggini (in adj. function with ī metri causa; otherwise as adj. agginiṁ), meaning looking constantly after the fire, i. e. careful, observant, alert.

--agāra (agyâgāra) a heated room or hut with a fire Vin.I,24; IV,109; D.I,101, 102 (as v. l. BB for agāra); M.I,501; A.V,234, 250. --khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire, fire-brand S.II,85; A.IV,128; Th.2, 351 (°samākāmā); J.IV,139; VI,330; Ps.I,125; Dpvs.VI,37; Miln.304. --gata having become (like) fire Miln.302. --ja fire-born J.V,404 (C; text aggijāta). --ṭṭha fire-place J.V,155. --ṭṭhāna fire-place Vin.II,120 (jantāghare, in bathroom). --daḍḍha consumed by fire Dh.136; Pv.I,7⁴. --dāha (mahā°) a holocaust A.I,178. --nikāsin like fire J.III,320 (suriya). --nibbāna the extinction of fire J.I,212. --pajjota fire-light A.II,140 (one of the 4 lights, viz. canda°, suriya°, a°, paññā°). --paricaraṇa (-ṭṭhāna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended to DhA.I,199. --paricariyā fire-worship DhA.II,232; SnA. 291 (pāri°) 456. --paricārika one who worship the fire a v.263 (brāhmaṇa). --sālā a heated hall or refectory Vin.I,25, 49 = II.210; I,139; II,154. --sikhā the crest of the fire, the flame, in simile °ûpama, like a flaming fire Sn.703; Dh.308 = It.43, 90 (ayoguḷa). --hutta (nt.) the sacrificial fire (see above 2), Vin.I,33, 36 = J.I,83; Vin.I,246 = Sn.568 (°mukha-yañña); S.I,166; Dh.392; Sn.249, p. 79; J.IV,211; VI,525; ThA.136 (= aggi); DhA.IV,151 (°ṁ brāhmaṇo namati). --huttaka (nt.) fire-offering J.VI,522 (= aggi-jūhana C.). --hotta = °hutta SnA 456 (v. l. BB °hutta). --homa fire-oblation (or perhaps sacrificing to Agni) D.I,9 (= aggi-jūhana DA.I,93). (Page 4)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】火。~kkhandha,【阳】火蕴，火海。~paricaraṇa,【中】奉火，拜火。~sālā,【阴】火房，桑那浴室。~sikhā,【阴】火焰。~hutta,【中】火供。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aggihutta: {'def': '(aggi火+hutta供物),【中】火供(物)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aggika: {'def': '(adj.) [aggi + ka] one who worships the fire Vin.I,71.(jaṭilaka); D.II,339.sq. (jaṭila); S.I,166.(brāhmaṇa). (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(aggi + ka),【形】拜火的人(one who worships the fire)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aggivessana: {'def': '【阳】阿奇舍那 (人名, 参考大正新修大藏经1:757)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agha: {'def': '² (m. nt.) [the etym. suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 200 (with ref. to M.I,500, which belongs under agha¹) is untenable (to Sk. kha, as a-kha = agha, cp. Jain Prk. khaha). Neither does the pop. etym. of Bdhgh. offer any clue (= a + gha from ghan that which does not strike or aghaṭṭaniya is not strikeable DhsA.326, cp. Dhs. trsl. 194 & J.IV,154 aghe ṭhitā = appaṭighe ākāse ṭhitā the air which does not offer any resistance). On the other hand the primary meaning is darkness, as seen from the phrase lokantarikā aghā asaṁvutā andhakārā D.II,12; S.V,454, and BSk. aghasaṁvṛta M Vastu I.240, adj. dark M Vastu I.41; II,162; Lal Vist 552] the sky, orig. the dark sky, dark space, the abyss of space D.II,12; S.V,45; Vv 16¹ (aghasi gama, Loc. = vehāsaṁ gama VvA.78); J.IV,154; Dhs.638 (+ aghagata); Vbh.84 (id.).

--gata going through or being in the sky or atmosphere Dhs.638, 722; Vbh.84. --gāmin moving through the atmosphere or space i. e. a planet S.I,67 = Miln.242 (ādicco seṭṭho aghagāminaṁ). (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (语基为aghas)(Sk. agha, of uncertain etym.),【中】【形】1.罪恶，不幸。2.伤心事，痛苦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Sk. agha, of uncertain etym.] evil, grief, pain, suffering, misfortune S I 22; M.I,500 (roga gaṇḍa salla agha); A.II,128 (id.); J.V,100; Th.2, 491; Sdhp.51. -- adj. painful, bringing pain J.VI,507 (agha-m-miga = aghakara m. C.). --bhūta a source of pain S.III,189 (+ agha & salla). (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2, 难以防守的(is untenable)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 天空。 2. 伤心事，痛苦。 3. 罪恶，不幸。(p3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aghammiga: {'def': '[to agha¹?] a sort of wild animal J.VI,247 (= aghāvaha miga) 507 (= aghakara). Cp. BSk. agharika Divy 475. (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aghata: {'def': 'at Th.1, 321 may be read as agha-gata or (preferably) with v. l. as aggha-gataṁ, or (with Neumann) as agghaṁ agghatānaṁ. See also Mrs. Rh. D, Psalms of the Brethren, p. 191. (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aghavin: {'def': '(agha痛苦+vin有),【形】有痛苦(suffering pain, being in misery)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [to agha¹] suffering pain, being in misery Sn.694 (= dukkhita SnA 489). (Page 5)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aghāvin: {'def': '(agha痛苦+āvin有) 【形】【阳】有痛苦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agocara: {'def': '【阳】非行处。六种非行处，即如︰到妓院、寡妇、处女、阉人、比丘尼、酒家托钵。Chabbidhe ca agocare carati. Seyyathidaṁ-- vesiyāgocare vidhavathulla-kumārika-paṇḍaka-bhikkhunī-pānāgāra- gocareti.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agādha: {'def': '【形】 1. 非常深的。 2. 无支持者的。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】1.非常深的。2.无支持者的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agāra: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. agāra, probably with the a- of communion; Gr. a]gei(rw to collect, a)gorά market. Cp. in meaning & etym. gaha¹]. -- 1. house or hut, usually implying the comforts of living at home as opp. to anagāra homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant). See anagāriyā. -- Thus freq. in two phrases contrasting the state of a householder (or layman, cp. gihin), with that of a religious wanderer (pabbajita), viz. (a.) kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati “to shave off hair & beard, put on the yellow robes, and wander forth out of the home into the homeless state” D.I,60 etc.; cp. Nd² 172^II. See also S.I,185 (agārasmā anagāriyaṁ nikkhanta); M.II,55 (agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā); Sn.274, 805 (°ṁ āvasati), and with pabbajita D.I,89, 115, 202, 230; Pv.II,13¹⁷. -- (b.) of a “rājā cakkavattin” compared with a “sambuddha”: sace agāraṁ āvasati vijeyya paṭhaviṁ imaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena . . . sace ca so pabbajati agārā anagāriyaṁ vivaṭacchado sambuddho arahā bhavissati “he will become the greatest king when he stays at home, but the greatest saint when he takes up the homeless life”, the prophesy made for the infant Gotama D.II,16; Sn.1002, 1003. -- Further passages for agāra e. g. Vin.I,15; D.I,102 (BB. has v. l. agyâgāra, but DA.I,270 expl. as dānâgāra); A.I,156, 281; II,52 sq.; Dh.14, 140; J.I,51, 56; III,392; Dpvs. I.36. -- 2. anagāra (adj.) houseless, homeless; a mendicant (opp. gahaṭṭha) Sn.628 = Dh.404; Sn.639, 640 (+ paribbaje); Pv.II,2⁵ (= anāvāsa PvA.80). -- (nt.) the homeless state (= anagāriyā) Sn.376. See also agga². -- 3. °āgāra: Owing to freq. occurrence of agāra at the end of cpds. of which the first word ends in a, we have a dozen quite familiar words ending apparently in āgāra. This form has been considered therefore as a proper doublet of agāra. This however is wrong. The long ā is simply a contraction of the short a at the end of the first part of the cpd. with the short a at the beginning of agāra. Of the cpds. the most common are: -- āgantuk° reception hall for strangers or guests S.IV,219; V,21. -- itth° lady’s bower S.I,58, 89. -- kūṭ° a house with a peaked roof, or with gables S.II,103. 263; III,156; IV,186; V,43; A.I,230; III,10, 364; IV,231; V,21. --koṭṭh° storehouse, granary D.I,134 (cp. DA.I,295); S.I,89. --tiṇ° a house covered with grass S.IV,185; A.I,101. --bhus° threshing shed, barn A.I,241. --santh° a council hall D.I,91; II,147; S.IV,182; V,453; A.II,207; IV,179 sq. --suññ° an uninhabited shed; solitude S.V,89, 157, 310 sq., 329 sq.; A.I,241 (v. l. for bhusâgāra); III,353; IV,139, 392, 437; V,88, 109, 323 sq. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐āgāra(cp. Sk. agāra)﹐【中】屋，家，境。【形】住宅。anagāra, 游行僧(homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant))。rājāgāra, 王宫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】屋。【形】住宅。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Agāraka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. agāra] a small house, a cottage M.I,450; J.VI,81. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹agāra) 【中】小屋(a small house, a cottage)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Agārika: {'def': 'agāriya,【形】【中】在家人，俗人(a householder, layman)。【阳】一家之主。agārikā,【阴】女主人(a housewife)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) 1. having a house, in eka°, dva° etc. D.I,166 = A.I,295 = II,206. -- 2. a householder, layman Vin.I,17. f. agārikā a housewife Vin.I,272. See also āgārika. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'agāriya,【形、中】俗人。【阳】一家之主。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Agārin: {'def': '(‹agāra,【形】【阳】一家之主。agārinī,【阴】女主人(a housewife)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. agāra] one who has or inhabits a house, a householder Sn.376, Th.I,1009; J.III,234. -- f. agārinī a housewife Vv 52⁷ (= gehassāmmī VvA.225); Pv III,4³ (id. PvA.194). (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Agāriya: {'def': '= agārika, a layman M.I,504 (°bhūta). -- Usually in neg. anagāriyā (f.) the homeless state (= anagāraṁ) as opp. to agāra (q. v.) in formula agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajita (gone out from the house into the homeless state) Vin.I,15; M.I,16; II,55, 75; A.I,49; D.III,30 sq., 145 sq.; Sn.274, 1003; Pv.II,13¹⁶; DA.I,112. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aha: {'def': 'Aho (语基为ahas),【中】日子。在【合】中，后随有另一个词素时，它词形是 aho, 例如 ahoratta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (-°) & Aho (°-) (nt.) [Vedic ahan & ahas] a day. (1) °aha only in foll. cpds. & cases: Instr. ekâhena in one day J.VI,366; Loc. tadahe on that (same) day PvA.46; Acc. katipâhaṁ (for) some or several days J.I,152 etc. (kattpâha); sattāhaṁ seven days, a week Vin.I,1; D.II,14; J.IV,2, and freq.; anvahaṁ daily Dāvs.IV,8. -- The initial a of ahaṁ (Acc.) is elided after i, which often appears lengthened: kati ‘haṁ how many days? S.I,7; ekâha-dvī ‘haṁ one or two days J.I,292; dvīha-tī ‘han two or three days J.II,103; VvA.45; ekâha-dvī’h’accayena after the lapse of one or two days J.I,253. -- A doublet of aha is anha (through metathesis from ahan), which only occurs in phrases pubbanho & sāyanha (q. v.); an adj. der. fr. aha is °ahika: see pañcâhika (consisting of 5 days). -- (2) aho° in cpd. ahoratta (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. ahorātraṁ Av. Ś. I.209] & ahoratti (f.) day & night, occurring mostly in oblique cases and adverbially in Acc. ahorattaṁ: M.I,417 (°ânusikkhin); Dh.226 (id.; expl^d. by divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA.III,324); Th.1, 145 (ahorattā accayanti); J.IV,108 (°ānaṁ accaye); Pv.II,13¹ (°ṁ); Miln.82 (ena). -- ahorattiṁ Dh.387; J.VI,313 (v. l. BB for T. aho va rattiṁ). (Page 91)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】日子。在【合】中，后随有另一个词素时，它词形是 aho, 例如ahoratta。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (indecl.) [cp. Sk. aha & P. aho; Germ. aha; Lat. ehem etc.] exclamation of surprise, consternation, pain etc. “ch! alas! woe!”. Perhaps to be seen in cpd. °kāmā miserable pleasures lit. “woe to these pleasures!”) gloss at ThA.292 for T. kāmakāmā of Th.2, 506 (expl^d. by C. as “ahā ti lāmaka-pariyāyo”). See also ahaha. (Page 91)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ahaha: {'def': '【叹】唉！悲哀的惊呼。【中】一个极大的数字。【阳】阿诃诃地狱，一个地狱的名字。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[onomat. after exclamation ahahā: see aha¹] 1. exclamation of woe J.III,450 (ahahā in metre). -- 2. (nt.) N. of a certain division of Purgatory (Niraya), lit. oh woe! A.V,173 = Sn.p. 126. (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(A-发语辞)﹐【叹】唉！悲哀的惊呼。【中】一个极大的数位。【阳】阿诃诃地狱(niraya)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahaha niraya: {'def': '阿哈哈地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Ahata: {'def': '【形】新的，不破坏的。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(a未+hata损坏【过分】),【形】新的，不破坏的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahaŋ: {'def': '(amha 的【主，单】), 我。 ~kāra, 【阳】自我中心癖，自大。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ahaṁ: {'def': '(amha 的【主.单】), 我(甲骨文︰我；金文︰我。，似乎说两把‘戈’互砍，象徵「我」常常有冲突、矛盾、折磨。)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(prom.) [Vedic ahaṁ = Av. az∂m; Gr. e]gw/(n); Lat. ego; Goth. ik, Ags. ic, Ohg. ih etc.] pron. of 1^st person “I”. ‹-› Nom. sg. ahaṁ S.III,235; A.IV,53; Dh.222, 320; Sn.172, 192, 685, 989, 1054, 1143; J.I,61; II,159. -- In pregnant sense (my ego, myself, I as the one & only, i. e. egotistically) in foll. phrases: yaṁ vadanti mama . . na te ahaṁ S.I,116, 123; ahaṁ asmi “I am” (cp. ahaṁkāra below) S.I,129; III,46, 128 sq.; IV,203; A.II,212, 215 sq.; Vism.13; ahaṁ pure ti “I am the first” Vv 84⁵⁰ (= ahamahaṁkārā ti VvA.351). -- Gen. Dat. mayhaṁ Sn.431, 479; J.I,279; II,160, mama S.I,115; Sn.22, 23, 341, 997; J.II,159, & mamaṁ S.I,116; Sn.253 (= mama C.), 694, 982. -- Instr. mayā Sn.135, 336, 557, 982; J.I,222, 279. -- Acc. maṁ Sn.356, 366, 425, 936; J.II,159; III,26, & mamaṁ J.III,55, 394. -- Loc. mayi Sn.559; J III 188. The enclitic form in the sg. is me, & func- tions in diff. cases, as Gen. (Sn.983; J.II,159), Acc. (Sn.982), Instr. (J.I,138, 222), & Abl. -- Pl. Nom. mayaṁ (we) Sn.31, 91, 167, 999; J.II,159; VI,365, amhe J.II,129, & vayaṁ (q. v.). -- Gen. amhākaṁ J.I,221; II,159 & asmākaṁ Sn.p. 106. -- Acc. amhe J.I,222; II,415 & asme J.III,359. -- Instr. amhehi J.I,150; II,417 & asmābhi ThA.153 (Ap. 132). -- Loc. amhesu J.I,222. ‹-› The enclitic form for the pl. is no (for Acc. dat & Gen.): see under vayaṁ.

--kāra selfishness, egotism, arrogance (see also mamaṁkāra) M.III,18, 32; S.II,253; III,80, 136, 169 sq.; IV,41, 197, 202; A.I,132 sq.; III,444; Ud.70; Nett 127, and freq. passim. (Page 91)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ahaṁkāra: {'def': '【阳】自我中心癖(selfishness, egotism)，自大(arrogance)。(see also mamaṁkāra)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahe: {'def': '(indecl.) [= aho, cp. aha¹] exclamation of surprise or bewilderment: alas! woe etc., perhaps in cpd. ahevana a dense forest (lit. oh! this forest, alas! the forest (i. e. how big it is) J.V,63 (uttamāhevanandaho, if reading is correct, which is not beyond doubt. C. on p. 64 expl^s. as “ahevanaṁ vuccati vanasaṇḍo”). (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ahetu: {'def': '(a无+hetu因), 无因。ahetu-appaccaya﹐无因无缘。ahetukavāda,无因论。SA.22.62./II,279.︰Ahetukavādāti-ādīsu “natthi hetu natthi paccayo”ti gahitattā ahetukavādā.(无因论︰无因无缘，取名为无因论。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahetuka: {'def': '【形】无根据的，无显著原因的，无因的，无因生的。无因生的人（ahetuka）──是天生盲(jaccandha)、天生聋(jaccabadhira)、天生无嗅觉(jaccaghānaka)、天生哑(jaccamūga)、天生愚蠢(jaccajaḷa)、天生疯狂(jaccummattaka)、黄门(paṇḍaka)、双性根者(ubhatobyañjanaka；hermaphrodites)、太监(napuṁsaka中性者)、口吃(mamma；stammering)、落难的阿修罗(vinipātikāsura)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无根据的，无显着原因的，无因的。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ahetuka-diṭṭhi: {'def': '﹐【阴】无因见，此见认为没有污染或净化有情的因缘，所以该有情是由於偶然、命运或需要而被污染或净化。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahi: {'def': '[Vedic ahi, with Av. aži perhaps to Lat. anguis etc., see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v.] a snake Vin.II,109; D.I,77; S.IV,198; A.III,306 sq.; IV,320; V,289; Nd¹ 484; Vism.345 (+ kukkura etc.); VvA.100; PvA.144.

--kuṇapa the carcase of a snake Vin.III,68 = M.I,73 = A.IV,377. --gāha a snake catcher or trainer J.VI,192. --guṇṭhika (? reading uncertain, we find as vv. ll. °guṇḍika, °guṇṭika & °kuṇḍika; the BSk. paraphrase is °tuṇḍika Divy 497. In view of this uncertainty we are unable to pronounce a safe etymology; it is in all probability a dialectical; may be Non-Aryan, word. See also under kuṇḍika & guṇṭhika & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1886, 153) a snake charmer J.I,370 (°guṇḍ°); II,267; III,348 (°guṇḍ°); IV,456 (T. °guṇṭ; v. l. BB °kuṇḍ°) 308 (T. °kuṇḍ°, v. l. SS °guṇṭh°), 456 (T. °guṇṭ°; v. l. BB °kuṇḍ); VI,171 (T. °guṇḍ°; v. l. BB °kuṇḍ°); Miln.23, 305. --chattaka (nt.) “a snake’s parasol”, a mushroom D.III,87; J.II,95; Ud.81 (C. on VIII,5, 1). --tuṇḍika = °guṇṭhika Vism.304, 500. --peta a Peta in form of a snake DhA.II,63. --mekhalā “snake-girdle”, i. e. outfit or appearance of a snake DhA.I,139. --vātaka (-roga) N. of a certain disease (“snakewind-sickness”) Vin.I,78; J.II,79; IV,200; DhA.I,169, 187, 231; III,437. --vijjā “snake-craft”, i. e. fortune-telling or sorcery by means of snakes D.I,9 (= sappa-daṭṭhatikicchana-vijjā c’eva sapp’avhāyana-vijjā ca. “the art of healing snake bites as well as the invocation of snakes (for magic purposes)” DA.I,93). (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic ahi),【阳】蛇(a snake)。ahikuṇapa,蛇屍(the carcase of a snake)。ahigāha,【阳】捕蛇者(a snake catcher or trainer)。ahiguṇṭhika(=ahiguṇḍika, ahiguṇṭika & ahikuṇḍika; the BSk. paraphrase is ahituṇḍika),【阳】捕蛇者(a snake charmer)。ahicchattaka,【阳】蕈(“a snake’s parasol”, a mushroom)。ahichatta,【中】伞蛇(DhpA.v.188./CS:pg.2.157)。Ahituṇḍika(=ahiguṇṭhika),【阳】捕蛇者。ahimekhalā,蛇的环带( “snake-girdle”, i. e. outfit or appearance of a snake DhA I.139)。ahivātaka(-roga),蛇风(“snakewind-sickness”)。ahipeta,蛇鬼(a Peta in form of a snake DhA II.63)。ahipheṇa,【中】鸦片。ahivijjā,【阴】蛇的学问，蛇的巫术( “snake-craft”, i. e. fortune-telling or sorcery by means of snakes，D.I,9. (Ahivijjāti sappadaṭṭhatikicchanavijjā ceva sappāvhāyanavijjā ca. “the art of healing snake bites as well as the invocation of snakes (for magic purposes)” DA.1./I,93.))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蛇。~guṇṭhika,【阳】捕蛇者。~cchattaka,【阳】蕈。~tuṇḍika,【阳】捕蛇者。~pheṇa,【中】鸦片。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ahirika: {'def': '【形】不知羞耻的。【中】不知羞耻。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Ahirīka (adj.) [fr. a + hirī] shameless, unscrupulous D.III,212, 252, 282; A.II,219; Dh.244; Sn.133 (°īka); It.27 (°īka); Pug.19 (also nt. unscrupulousness); Dhs.365; Nett 39, 126; DhA.III,352. (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'ahirīka, (a无+hiri惭+ika (形容词化) ),【形】不知羞耻的。【中】不知羞耻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahita: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [a + hita] not good or friendly, harmful, bad; unkindliness D.III,246; Dh.163; Sn.665, 692; Miln.199 (°kāma). (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】伤害，无情。【形】有害的。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(a无+hita利益) ,【中】无利益，伤害，无情。【形】有害的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahivātakaroga: {'def': '【阳】黑死病，淋巴腺鼠疫。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】黑死病，淋巴腺鼠疫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahiŋsā: {'def': '【阴】非伤害。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ahiṁsaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ahiṁsā] not injuring others, harmless, humane, S.I,165; Th.1, 879; Dh.225; J.IV,447. (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ahiṁsā: {'def': '(a无+hiṁsā伤害),【阴】无伤害。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [a + hiṁsā] not hurting, humanity, kindness D.III,147; A.I,151; Dh.261, 270; J.IV,71; Miln.402. (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aho: {'def': '【中】日 (°-) (= -aha日)。ahovata, 的确呀！', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [Sk. aho, for etym. see aha¹] exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed, well; I say! for sure! VvA.103 (aho ti acchariy’atthena nipāto); J.I,88 (aho acchariyaṁ aho abbhutaṁ), 140. Usually comb^d. with similar emphatic particles, e. g. aho vata DhA.II,85; PvA.131 (= sādhu vata); aho vata re D.II,107; Pv.II,9^{4 5}. Cp. ahe. (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. aho)(=ahe),【无】哎呀！惊奇或惊愕的惊呼(exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed, well; I say! for sure!)。“aho sukhaṁ aho sukhan”ti (快乐得不得了！快乐得不得了！)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】哎呀！惊奇或惊愕的惊呼。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ahoratta: {'def': '【中】昼夜，白天和夜晚。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(aho日+ratta夜间),【中】【阳】昼夜，白天和夜晚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahoratti: {'def': '(aho日+ratti夜间),【阴】日夜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahosi: {'def': '(hoti 的【过】), 他是。 ~kamma, 【中】没有任何潜在力量的一种思想行为。(p49)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(hoti 的【过】), 他是。ahosikamma,【中】没有任何潜在力量的一种思想行为。SA.1.50./I,92.︰Ahuvāti ahosi.(他是︰他是。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahosi-kamma: {'def': '(nt.) an act or thought whose kamma has no longer any potential force: Cpd. 145. At p. 45 ahosikakamma is said to be a kamma inhibited by a more powerful one. See Buddhaghosa in Vism. Chap. XIX. (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ahu: {'def': 'Ahū, 变成( [ hoti变成] 的【3.单.过】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahugāliya: {'def': '【中】大声的笑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】大声的笑。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ahuhāliya: {'def': '(nt.) [onomat.] a hoarse & loud laugh J.III,223 (= danta-vidaṁsaka-mahā-hasita C.). (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ahutvā: {'def': '(a不+hutvā 变成【独】),【独】不变成。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahuvāsiṁ: {'def': '1^st sg. pret. of hotī (q. v.) I was Vv 82⁶ (= ahosiṁ VvA.321). (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ahāriya: {'def': '【形】固定的。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ahāsa: {'def': '[a + hāsa, cp. Sk. ahāsa & aharṣa] absence of exultancy, modesty J.III,466 (= an-ubbillāvitattaṁ C.). (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ahāsi: {'def': '3^rd sg. aor. of harati (q. v.). (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[harati运送[…去]?拿[…去]?拿去?窃夺] 的【单.叁.过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ahīnindriya: {'def': '【形】没有任何感官残缺的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see discussed under abhinindriya. (Page 92)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】没有任何感官残缺的人。(p48)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aja: {'def': '【阳】山羊。 ~pāla,【阳】牧羊人。 ~laṇḍikā,【阴】羊粪。(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic aja fr. aj (Lat. ago to drive), cp. ajina] a hegoat, a ram D.I,6, 127; A.II,207; J.I,241; III,278 sq.; V,241; Pug.56; PvA.80.

--eḷaka [Sk. ajaiḍaka] goats & sheep D.I,5, 141; A.II,42 sq., 209; J.I,166; VI,110; Pug.58. As pl. °ā S.I,76; It.36; J.IV,363. --pada goat-footed M.I,134. --pāla goatherd, in °nigrodharukkha (Npl.) “goatherds’Nigrodha-tree” Vin.I,2 sq. Dpvs.I,29 (cp. M Vastu III,302). --pālikā a woman goatherd Vin.III,38. --lakkhaṇa “goat-sign”, i. e. prophesying from signs on a goat etc. D.I,9 (expl^d. DA.I,94 as “evarūpānaṁ ajānaṁ mansaṁ khāditabbaṁ evarūpānaṁ na khāditabban ti”). --laṇḍikā (pl.) goats’dung, in phrase nāḷimattā a. a cup full of goats’dung (which is put down a bad minister’s throat as punishment) J.I,419; DhA.II,70; PvA.282. --vata “goats’habit”, a practice of certain ascetics (to live after the fashion of goats) J.IV,318.

aja-pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat’s hoof; so also at Vism.161. (Page 9)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】山羊。ajapāla,【阳】牧羊人。ajalaṇḍikā,【阴】羊粪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajaan: {'def': '阿姜; 老师(泰语)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': 'Ajan, Ajahn, Ajarn, Acharn(巴ācariya),【泰语(อาจารย)】阿姜，阿旃，老师。近代有名的泰僧有︰指由阿姜索Ajan Sao Kantasilo,1861~1941）与其弟子阿姜曼（Ajan Man Bhuridatta, 1871~1949），再传弟子：阿姜帖（Ajan Thate Desaransi, 1902 ~1994）、阿姜力（Ajan Lee Dhammadharo,1907 ~1961）阿姜信（Ajan Sim Buddhacaro 1909-1992）、阿姜摩诃布瓦（Ajan Maha Boow ñāṇasampanno ,1913 ~）、阿姜查（Ajan Chah 1918-1992）等。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajacca: {'def': '(adj.) [a + jacca] of low birth J.III,19; VI,100. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajaddhuka: {'def': '& Ajaddhumāra see jaddhu. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajagara: {'def': '【阳】蟒蛇(boa constrictor)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蟒蛇。(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[aja + gara = gala fr. *gel to devour, thus “goateater”] a large snake (rock-snake?), Boa Constrictor J.VI,507; Miln.23, 303, 364, 406; DhA.III,60. Also as ajakara at J.III,484 (cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 64). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajajjara: {'def': '(a+jajjara),【形】不老，不枯萎，不衰弱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see jajjara. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajajjarita: {'def': '(a+jajjarita),【过分】已不老。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajaka: {'def': 'a goat, pl. goats Vin.II,154. -- f. ajikā J.III,278 & ajiyā J.V,241. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajamoja: {'def': '[Sk. ajamoda, cp. Sk. ajājī] cummin-seed VvA.186. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajañña: {'def': '【形】不纯的，不洁净的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不纯的，不洁净的.(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajeyya: {'def': '² (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jīyati, q. v.] not decaying, not growing old, permanent J.VI,323. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ & Ajjeyya (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jayati, q. v.] ‹-› (a) not to be taken by force Kh VIII,8 (cp. KhA 223). ‹-› (b) not to be overpowered, invincible Sn.288; J.V,509. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (a + jeyya, grd. of jīyati) ,【形】不衰的，不老的，永恒(not decaying, not growing old, permanent)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 & Ajjeyya(a + jeyya, grd. of jayati),【形】1.不能被强取的(not to be taken by force)。2.不能征服的(not to be overpowered, invincible)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不能征服的。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajimha: {'def': '【形】不弯曲的，直的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不弯曲的，直的。(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajina: {'def': '【阳】猎豹（有黑色斑点，腿长善跑）。【中】猎豹皮。 ~kkhipa,【阳】猎豹皮披风。 ~ppaveṇī,【阴】猎豹皮床单。 ~yoni, 一种的羚羊。 ~sāṭi, 皮衣。(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats’skin] the hide of the black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics D.I,167; Sn.1027; J.I,12, 53; IV,387; V,407. kharājina a rough skin (as garment) M.I,343; S.IV,118; A.II,207; Sn.249 (= kharāni a°-cammāni SnA 291). dantājina? ivory (q. v.).

--khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope’s hide D.I,167; S.I,117; A.I,240, 295; II,206; Vin.I,306; III,34; J.VI,569. --paveṇi a cloth of the size of a couch made from pieces of ant. skin sewn together Vin.I,192; D.I,7 (= ajina-cammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇi DA.I,87); A.I,181. --sāṭī a garment of skins (= ajina-camma-sāṭī DhA.IV,156) Dh.394 = J.I,481 = III,85. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats’skin),【阳】猎豹(cheetah，有黑色斑点，腿长善跑)，羊皮。【中】猎豹皮。ajinakkhipa,【阳】猎豹皮披风。ajinappaveṇī(编织品),【阴】猎豹皮编织品。ajinayoni, 一种的羚羊。ajinasāṭi, 皮衣。kharājinaṁ,粗糙的羊皮(一种苦行僧的衣著)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajinapattā: {'def': '【阴】蝙蝠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】蝙蝠。(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajini: {'def': 'aor 3^rd sg. jayati, q. v. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jināti 的【过】), 征服过。(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(jināti 的【过】), 征服过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajira: {'def': '(Vedic ajira to aj),【中】院子(a court, a yard)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】院子。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.). [Vedic ajira to aj, cp. Gr. a)grόs, Lat. ager, Goth. akrs = Ger. Acker, = E. acre] a court, a yard Mhvs 35, 3. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajita: {'def': 'Kesakambala【阳】阿逸多·翅舍金披罗(人名)，属於唯物论，认为人就是他的身体，身体死亡就等於该人完全灭尽，死后没有识，也没有业的报应。「所有众多之沙门论师中，末伽梨论(Makkhalivādo)是最恶。诸比丘！(末伽梨)痴人是如是说、如是见：无有业(natthi kammaṁ)、无有业果(natthi kiriyaṁ)、无有精进(natthi vīriyaṁ)。」(A.3.137./I,411-412.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajiya: {'def': '= ajikā (see ajaka). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajja: {'def': '& Ajjā (adv.) [Vedic adya & adyā, a + dyā, a° being base of demonstr. pron. (see a³) and dyā an old Loc. of dyaus (see diva), thus “on this day”] to-day, now Sn.75, 153, 158, 970, 998; Dh.326; J.I,279; III,425 (read bahutaṁ ajjā; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. as “food”); Pv.I,11⁷ (= idāni PvA.59); PvA.6, 23; Mhvs 15, 64. ‹-› Freq. in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?) or ajja-tagge, see agga³) from this day onward, henceforth Vin.I,18; D.I,85; DA.I,235.

--kālaṁ (adv.) this morning J.VI,180; --divasa the present day Mhvs 32, 23. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Ajjā(Vedic adya & adyā, a + dyā, a° being base of demonstr. pron. (see a3) and dyā an old Loc. of dyaus (see diva), thus “on this day”),【无】今天，现在(to-day, now)。ajjatana,【形】新潮，指今天。ajjatanāya,【与】在今日。tayājja﹐三时(昼夜各三时)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】今天。 ~tagge, 【副】从今以后。 ~tana,【形】新潮，指今天。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjatana: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. adyatana] referring to the day, today’s, present, modern (opp. porāṇa) Th.1, 552; Dh.227; J.II,409. -- Dat. ajjatanāya for today Vin.I,17; PvA.171 & passim. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjati: {'def': '[Vedic arjati, ṛj, a variant of arh, see arahati] to get, procure, obtain J.III,263 (?). pp. ajjita (q. v.). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. ajja] the present time, in ajjatañ ca this very day S.I,83 (v. l. ajjeva). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjat’agge: {'def': '(ajja今日+agge从…起【介】),=ajjatagge), 从今日起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjava: {'def': '【阳】【中】正直，诚实。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. ārjava, to rju, see uju),【阳】【中】正直，诚实(straight, upright)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [cp. Sk. ārjava, to ṛju, see uju] straight, upright (usually comb^d. with maddava gentle, soft) D.III,213; A.I,94; II,113; III,248; Sn.250 (+ maddava), 292 (id.); J.III,274; Dhs.1339; Vbh.359 (an°); SnA 292 (= ujubhāva), 317 (id.). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjavatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. prec.] straight forwardness, rectitude, uprightness Dhs.1339. (+ ajimhatā & avaṅkatā). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjh-: {'def': 'Assimilation group of adhi + vowel. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhabhavi: {'def': '3^rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati to conquer, overpower, overcome S.I,240 (prohib. mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi); J.II,336. Cp. ajjhabhu & ajjhobhavati. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhabhu: {'def': '(3^rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati (q. v.) to overcome, conquer It.76 (dujjayaṁ a. he conquered him who is hard to conquer; v. l. ajjhabhi for ajjhabhavi). Cp. ajjhabhavi. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhabhāsati: {'def': '(adhi在…上+a+bhās说+a), 向…讲话，演说。ajjhabhāsi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhi + a + bhās + a), 向…讲话，演说。 ajjhabhāsi, 【过】。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhabhāsi: {'def': '3^rd sg. aor. of adhibhāseti to address S.IV,117 (gāthāhi); KhV, = Sn.p. 46 (gāthāya); PvA.56, 90. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhagā: {'def': '(adhigacchati ‘获得’的【过特】) 【3.单.过】来到，达到，获得，经验。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(Adhigacchati 的【过特】)（他）来到，达到，获得，经验。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[adhi + agā 3^rd sg. pret. of adhigacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he came to, got to, found, obtained, experienced S.I,12 (vimānaṁ); Sn.225 (expl^d. at KhA 180 by vindi paṭilabhi), 956 (ratiṁ; expl^d. at Nd¹ 457 by adhigacchi); It.69 (jātimaraṇaṁ); Dh.154 (taṇhānaṁ khayaṁ); Vv 32⁷ (visesaṁ attained distinction; expl^d. at VvA.135 by adhigata); 50²¹ (amataṁ santiṁ; expl^d. VvA.215 by v. l. SS adhigañchi, T. adhigacchati). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhapara: {'def': 'S.V,218: substitute v. l. accasara (q. v.). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhappatta: {'def': '【形】偶然遇到，突然接近。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& Ajjhapatta) [adhi + ā + *prāpta] 1. having reached, approached, coming near to J.II,450; VI,566 (p; C. attano santikaṁ patta). -- 2. having fallen upon, attacked J.II,59; V,198 (p; C. sampatta) -- 3. attained, found, got Sn.1134 (= adhigacchi Nd²); J.III,296 (p. C. sampatta); V,158 (ajjhāpatta; C. sampatta). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】偶然遇到，突然接近。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhatta: {'def': '(ajjh在…上+atta自我﹐cp.Sk.adhyātma, cp.attā),【形】自我身内，跟自己有关系的。ajjhattaṁ,【副】内在地、在自我身内。【反】bahiddhā﹐bāhira﹐外在的(outward)、外在地(outwardly)。ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā﹐或内或外。ajjhatta-bahiddhā﹐内外。Vbh.#2.︰Tattha katamaṁ rūpaṁ ajjhattaṁ? Yaṁ rūpaṁ tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ 1ajjhattaṁ 2paccattaṁ 3niyakaṁ 4pāṭipuggalikaṁ 5upādinnaṁ, cattāro ca mahābhūtā catunnañca mahābhūtānaṁ upādāyarūpaṁ--idaṁ vuccati rūpaṁ ajjhattaṁ.(在此，什么是‘内色’？凡是色法，那个这个众生1内(ajjhatta；internal)、2众生本身(paccattaṁ；personal 私人)、3各自(niyakaṁ；self-referable)、4己身(pāṭipuggalikaṁ；one’s own)、5个人(upādiṇṇaṁ；individual)、6已取者(upādāya rūpāṁ；is graped)的四大种及四大种所造色。) Vbh.#4.︰Tattha katamaṁ rūpaṁ bahiddhā? Yaṁ rūpaṁ tesaṁ tesaṁ parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ 1ajjhattaṁ 2paccattaṁ 3niyakaṁ 4pāṭipuggalikaṁ 5upādinnaṁ, cattāro ca mahābhūtā catunnañca mahābhūtānaṁ upādāyarūpaṁ--idaṁ vuccati rūpaṁ bahiddhā. (在此，什么是‘外色’？凡是色法，那个这个其他众生1内、2众生本身(私人)、3各自、4己身、5个人、6已取者的四大种及四大种所造色。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. -n.) [cp. Sk. adhyātma, cp. attā], that which is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to anything outside, objective or impersonal); as adv. & °interior, personal, inwardly (opp. bahiddhā bāhira etc. outward, outwardly); Cp. ajjhattika & see Dhs. trsl. 272. ‹-› D.I,37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2^nd jhāna), 70 = A.II,210; V,206 (inward happiness. a. sukkhaṁ = niyakajjhattaṁ attano santāne ti attho DA.I,183 cp. DhsA.169, 338, 361); S.I,70, 169; II,.27 (kathaṁ kathī hoti is in inward doubt), 40 (sukhaṁ dukkhaṁ); III,180 (id.); IV,1 sg. (āyatanāni), 139, 196; V,74 (ṭhitaṁ cittaṁ ajjhattaṁ susaṇṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), 110, 143, 263, 297, 390; A.I,40 (rūpasaññī), 272 (kāmacchanda etc.); II,158. (sukhadukkhaṁ), 211; III,86 (cetosamatha), 92 (vūpasantacitta); IV,32 (saṅkhittaṁ), 57 (itthindriyaṁ), 299 (cittaṁ), 305 (rūpasaññī), 360 (cetosamatha), 437 (vūpasantacitta); V 79 sq., 335 sq. (sati); It.39 (cetosamatha inward peace), 80, 82, 94; J.I,045 (chātajjhatta with hungry insides); V,338 (id.); Ps.I,76 (cakkhu etc.); Dhs.161 (= attano jātaṁ DhsA.169), 204, 1044; Pug.59; Vbh.1 sq. (khandhā), 228 (sati), 327 (paññā), 342 (arūˊpasaññī). -- adv. °ṁ inwardly, personally (in contrast-pair ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā; see also cpd. °bahiddhā) A.I,284; II,171; IV,305; V,61; Sn.917 (= upajjhayassa vā ā ācariyassa vā te guṇā assū ti Nd¹ 350).

--ārammaṇa a subjective object of thought Dhs.1047. --cintin thought occupied with internal things Sn.174, 388. --bahiddhā inside & outside, personal-external, mutual, interacting S.II,252 sq.; III,47; IV,382; Nd² 15; Dhs.1049 etc. (see also bahiddhā). --rata with inward joy D.II,107 = S.V,263 = Dh.362 = Ud.64 (+ samāhita); Th.1, 981; A.IV,312; DhA.IV,90 (= gocar’ajjhatta-saṅkhātāya kammaṭṭhāna-bhāvanāya rata). --rūpa one’s own or inner form Vin.III,113 (opp. bahiddhā-rūpa & ajjh°-bah° r.). --saññojana an inner fetter, inward bond A.I,63 sq.; Pug.22; Vbh.361. --santi inner peace Sn.837 (= ajjhattānaṁ rāgādīnaṁ santibhāva SnA 545; cp. Nd¹ 185). --samuṭṭhāna originating from within J.I,207 (of hiri; opp. bahiddhā°). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】私人的，跟自己有关系的。 ajjhattaŋ, 【副】内在地。 ajjhattika,【形】私人的，内在的。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhattabahiddhā: {'def': '(ajjhatta在自我身内【副】+bahiddhā在外部【副】) 【副】在自我身内及外部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhattarata: {'def': '(ajjhatta在自我身内+rata喜乐【过分】) 【过分】在自我身内喜乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhattika: {'def': '(ajjhatta自我身内+ika (形容词化) )【形】自我身内。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [ajjhatta + ika], personal, inward (cp. Dhs.trsl. 207 & Nd¹ 346: ajjhattikaṁ vuccati cittaṁ); opp. bāhira outward (q. v.). See also āyatana. -- M.I,62; S.I,73 (°ā rakkhā na bāhirā); IV,7 sq. (āyatanāni); V,101 (aṅga); A.I,16 (aṅga); II,164 (dhātuyo); III,400 (āyatanāni); V,52 (id.); It.114 (id.), 9 (aṅga); Kh IV. (= KhA 82); J.IV,402 (bāhira-vatthuṁ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaṁ gaṇhati); Dhs.673, 751; Vbh.13, 67, 82 sq., 119, 131, 392 sq. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ajjhatta+ika),【形】私人的(personal)，内在的(inward)。(Nd1 346：ajjhattikaṁ vuccati cittaṁ「内在的」称为「心」)。【反】bāhira﹐内在的(outward)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhavodahi: {'def': '3^rd sg. aor. of ajjhodahati [Sk. adhyavadhāti] to put down J.V,365 (= odahi, ṭhapesi C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading ajjhavādahi (= Sk. avādhāt). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhavāsayi: {'def': '1.使之滞留在…上。2.同意(adhivāseti的【3.单.过】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhayana: {'def': '【中】求学，学。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】求学，学。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [adhi + i] study (learning by heart) of the Vedas Miln.225. See also ajjhena. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhena: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. adhyayana, see also ajjhayana] study (esp. of the Vedas) M.III,1; J.II,327 (as v. l. to be preferred to ajjhesanā); III,114 (= japa); V,10 (pl. = vede); VI,201 = 207; Vbh.353; SnA 314 (mant’).

--kujja (°kūta v. l.?) a hypocrite, a pharisee Sn.242; cp. SnA 286. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhesanā: {'def': '(f.) [see ajjhesati] request, entreaty Vin.I,6 = D.II,38 = S.I,138; J.II,327 (better v. l. ajjhena). (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】请求，邀请。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】请求，邀请。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhesati: {'def': '(adhi + iṣ; cp. BSk. adhyeṣate Divy 160] to request, ask, bid DhA.IV,18; aor. ajjhesi Vin.II,200; pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita (q. v.), with which cp. pariyiṭṭha & °esita. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi + isu + a), 请求，邀请。 ajjhesayi, 【过】。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+isu +a), 请求，邀请。ajjhesayi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhesita: {'def': '(ajjhesati 的【过分】)。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ajjhesati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of ajjhesati; cp. ajjhiṭṭha] requested, asked, bidden Nd² 16 (= ajjhiṭṭha). (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjheti: {'def': '[Sk. ādhyāyati, denom. fr. adhyāya] to be anxious about, to fret, worry Sn.948 (socati +); expl^d at Nd¹ 433 by nijjhāyati, at SnA 568 by abhijjhati (gloss BB gijjhati). (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhiṭṭha: {'def': '(ajjhesati 的【过分】)。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of ajjhesati] requested, asked, invited Vin.I,113 (an° unbidden); D.II,289 (Buddhaghosa and text read ajjhitta); Sn.p. 218 (= ajjhesita Nd² 16); J.VI,292 (= āṇatta C.); DhA.IV,100 (v. l. abhijjhiṭṭha). See also an°. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhobhavati: {'def': '[adhi + ava + bhu, Sk. abhi°] to overcome, overpower, destroy J.II,80 (aor. ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi C.). (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhogāhati: {'def': '(adhi + ava + gāh + a), 使…插进，进入，陷入。 ajjhogāhi, 【过】。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+ava下+gāh冲进﹑埋首+a),使…插进，进入，陷入。ajjhogāhi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& °gāheti) [Sk. *abhyavagāhate; adhi (= abhi) + ava + gāh] to plunge into, to enter, to go into D.I,101 (vanaṁ), 222 (samuddaṁ); M.I,359, 536; A.III,75, 368; IV,356; V,133; Vin.III,18; J.I,7; Nd¹ 152 (ogāhati +); Miln.87 (samuddaṁ); 300 (vanaṁ). -- pp. ajjhogāḷha (q. v.). Cp. pariyogāhati. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhogāḷha: {'def': '[pp. of ajjhogāhati] plunged into, immersed; having entered M.I,457; S.I,201; Miln.348. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ajjhogāhati的【过分】) 插进，进入，陷入。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhoharati: {'def': '(adhi + ava + har + a), 吞。ajjhohari,【过】。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+ava下+har运送+a), 吞(直译：在上下运送)。ajjhohari,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. abhyavaharati; adhi (= abhi) + ava + hṛ] to swallow, eat, take as food M.I,245; J.I,460; II,293; VI,205, 213; Miln.366; PvA.283 (aor.) --pp. ajjhohaṭa (q.v.). (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhoharaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) = ajjhohāra 1. A.V,324; J.VI,213. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】吞，食。ajjhoharaṇīya,【形】可以吞或吃的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】吞，食。~ṇīya,【形】可以吞或吃的。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhoharaṇiya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of ajjhoharati] something fit to eat, eatable, for eating J.VI,258; DhA.I,284. (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhohata: {'def': '[pp. of ajjhoharati] having swallowed Sdhp.610 (balisaṁ maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook). (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhohaṭa: {'def': '(ajjhoharati 的【过分】)。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ajjhoharati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhohita: {'def': '【过分】塞满过（嘴）。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】塞满过(嘴)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhohāra: {'def': '[Sk. abhyavahāra] 1. taking food, swallowing, eating & drinking Vin.IV,233; Miln.176, 366. -- 2. N. of a fabulous fish (swallower”; cp. timingala) J.V,462. (Page 13)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】吞。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】吞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhokirati: {'def': '(adhi在…上+ava下+kir散+a), 散布，撒(在上散下)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhi + ava + kir + a), 散布，撒。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhokāsa: {'def': '【阳】露天，户外。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[adhi + okāsa] the open air, only in Loc. ajjhokāse in the open Vin.I,15; S.I,212; DhA.IV,100. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】露天，户外。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjholambati: {'def': '[adhi + ava + lamb] to hang or hold on to (Acc.), to cling to S III 137; M.III,164 = Nett 179, cp. Sdhp.284 & 296. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhomaddati: {'def': '[adhi + ava + mṛd] to crush down A.IV,191, 193. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhomucchita: {'def': '[pp. adhi + ava + mūrch, cp. adhimuccita] stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) A.III,57 sq. (v. l. ajjhomuñcïta or °muccita better: sarīre attached to her body, clinging to her b.). (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhopanna: {'def': '﹐adhipanna (adhi+panna)﹐1.【过分】到达。2.【过分】抓住(adhipajjati‘到达’的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q. v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with ref. to selfishness, greed, bonds of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior, but the accredited reading ajjhosāna seems to be clearer and to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosāna (n.) in the same context. The confusion between the two is old-standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under v. l. to M.I,162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as BB (= adhi-opanna). The MSS. of Nd² clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading, which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS sub‹-› stitution of p for s (see Nd² Introd. XIX.). Besides this mixture of vv. ll. with s and p there is another confusion between the vv. ll. ajjhāpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may consider the o as established, and, with a little more clearness to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosāna (q. v.), which in this case would have been liable to change through analogy with ajjhāpanna, from which it took the ā and p. Cp. also ajjhosita. The foll. is a synopsis of readings as preferred or confused by the Ed. of the var. texts. -- 1. ajjhopanna as T. reading: M.I,162, 173, 369; A.I,74; II,28; III,68, 242; Md 75, 76; DA.I,59; as v. l.: D.I,245. ‹-› 2. ajjhosāna as v. l.: A.I,74 (C. expl^s. ajjhosāya gilitvā ṭhita); Nd² under nissita & passim; Ud.75, 76 (ajjhosanna); DA.I,59 (id.). -- 3. ajjhāpanna as T. reading: D.I,245; III,43, 46; S. II,194, 270: IV.332 (ajjhapaṇṇa); A.V,178, 181; Nd² under nissita; Miln.401; as v. l.: M.I,162; A.III,242; Ud.75, 76. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhosa: {'def': '(= ajjhosāya), 黏住(in verse only as ajjhosa tiṭṭhati to cleave or cling to S.IV,73; Th.1, 98, 794.)。nājjhosa tiṭṭhati, 不黏住。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '= ajjhosāya, in verse only as ajjhosa tiṭṭhati to cleave or cling to S.IV,73; Th.1, 98, 794. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhosati: {'def': '[adhi + ava + sayati, sā, to bind, pp. sita: see ajjhosita] to be bound to, to be attached, bent on; to desire, cleave to, indulge in. Fut. ajjhosissati (does it belong here?) M.I,328 (c. Acc. paṭhaviṁ, better as ajjhesati). grd. ajjhositabha M.I,109 (+ abhinanditabba, v. l. °etabba); DhsA.5 (id.); ger. ajjhosāya (q. v.) pp. ajjhosita (q. v.). (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+ava下+sayati依靠), 上下依靠。【过分】ajjhosita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhosita: {'def': '[cp. Sk. adhyavasita, from adhi + ava + sā; but sita is liable to confusion with sita = Sk. śrita, also through likeness of meaning with esita; see ajjhāsita & ajjhesita] hanging on, cleaving to, being bent on, (c. Loc.) S.II,94 (+ mamāyita); A.II,25 (diṭṭha suta muta +); Nd¹ 75, 106, 163 = Nd² under nissita; Th.2, 470 (asāre = taṇhāvasena abhiniviṭṭha ThA.284); Pv IV.8⁴ (mayhaṁ ghare = taṇhābhinivisena abhiniviṭṭha PvA.267; v. l. BB ajjhesita, SS ajjhāsita). --an° S.IV,213; V,319; Nd¹ 411; Miln.74 (pabbajita). (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhosāna: {'def': '(nt.) cleaving to (earthly joys), attachment, D.II,58 sq.; III,289; M.I,498 (+ abhinandana); S.III,187; A.I,66; II,11 (diṭṭhi°, kāma° + taṇhā). In comb^n. with (icchā) and mucchā at Nd² under chanda & nissita and taṇhā (see also ajjhopanna), and at Dhs.1059 of lābha, (the expl^n. at DhsA.363, 370, from as to eat, is popular etym.) Nett 23 sq. (of taṇhā). (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】黏住(cleaving to (earthly joys))，耽溺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】联结。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhosāya: {'def': '[ger. of ajjhosati, cp. BSk. adhyavasāya tiṣṭhati Divy 37, 534] being tied to, hanging on, attached to, only in phrase a. tiṭṭhati (+ abhinandati, same in Divy) M.I,266; S. IV.36 sq.; 60, 71 sq.; Miln.69. See also ajjhosa. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhottharati: {'def': '[adhi + ava + stṛ] to cover over, spread out, spread over, cover; to submerge, flood Vin.I,111; J.I,61, 72, 73; Miln.296, 336; Dh.I,264; Pass. °tthariyati to be overrun with (Instr.), to be smothered, to be flooded A.III,92 = Pug.67; aor. ajjhotthari VvA.48 (gāmapadeso: was flooded). pp. ajjhotthata (q. v.). (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi + ava + thar + a), 淹没，制服。 ajjhotthari, 【过】。(p6)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'ajjhogāheti, (adhi在…上+ava下+thar+a), 淹没，制服。ajjhotthari,【过】。【独】ajjhogahetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhotthata: {'def': '[pp. of ajjhottharati] spread over; covered, filled; overcome, crushed, overpowered J.I,363 (ajjhottaṭa), 410; V,91 (= adhipanna); DhA.I,278; PvA.55; Dāvs.V,5. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhotthaṭa: {'def': '(Ajjhottharati的【过分】) 淹没，制服。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhoṭhapeti: {'def': '[adhi + ava + ṭhapeti, Caus. of sthā] to bring to PvA.148 (gāmaṁ), where we should read °ṭṭhapeti. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhupagacchati: {'def': '[adhi + upa + gam] to come to, to reach, obtain; to consent to, agree, submit Th.2, 474 (= sampaṭicchati ThA.285); J.II,403; Miln.300; pp. ajjhupagata (q. v.). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi + upa + gam + a), 1. 来到，到达。 2. 同意。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+upa近+gam去+a), 1.来到，到达。2.同意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhupagamana: {'def': '【中】1.抵达。2.协定，同意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [adhi + upa + gam] consent, agreement, justification Vin.II,97, 104. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 抵达。 2. 协议，同意。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhupagata: {'def': '[pp. of ajjhupagacchati] come to, obtained, reached A.V,87, cp. 210; V,187 sq. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Ajjhupagacchati的【过分】) 1.来到，到达。2.同意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhupaharati: {'def': '[adhi + upa + hṛ; cp. upaharati] to take (food) to oneself J.II,293 (aor. ajjhupāhari = ajjhohari C.). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhupekkhana: {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) [abstr. from ajjhupekkhati] care, diligence, attention Ps.I,16; II,119; Vbh.230 sq.; DhA.IV,3. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 ~nā,【阴】不在乎，粗心大意。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】ajjhupekkhanā,【阴】冷淡(indifference)，不在乎(negligence)，中舍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhupekkhati: {'def': '(adhi在…上+upa近+ikkh(梵īks)见+a), 在上旁观，忽略。ajjhupekkhi,【过】。ajjhupekkhita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+upekkhati旁观) 在上旁观。【过分】ajjhupekkhita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhi + upa + ikkh + a), 不关心，忽略。 ajjhupekkhi, 【过】。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[adhi + upa + ikṣ; cp. BSk. adhyupekṣati] 1. to look on A.I,257; Miln.275. -- 2. to look on intently or with care, to oversee, to take care of A.IV,45 (kaṭṭh’aggi, has to be looked after); PvA.149 (sisaṁ colaṁ vā). -- 3. to look on indifferently to be indifferent, to neglect Vin.II,78 = III,162, cp. J.I,147; M.I,155; II,223; A.III,194, 435; J.V,229; DhA.IV,125. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhupekkhitar: {'def': '(‹ajjhupekkhati在上旁观),【阳】在上旁观者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[n. ag. to ajjhupekkhati] one who looks on (carefully), one who takes care or controls, an overseer, caretaker S.V,69 (sādhukaṁ), 324 (id.), 331 sq.; Vbh.227. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹ajjhupekkhati在上旁观) 【阳】在上旁观者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhupeti: {'def': '[cp. Sk. abhyupeti; adhi + upa + i] to go to meet, to receive J.IV,440. (Page 12)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+upa近+i+a), 靠近，接近。ajjhupesi,【过】。ajjhupeta,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhi + upa + i + a), 靠近，接近。 ajjhupesi, 【过】。 ajjhupeta, 【过分】。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhābhava: {'def': '[cp. Sk. adhyābhava] excessive power, predominance J.II,357. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhābhavati: {'def': '[adhi + ā + bhū, in meaning of abhi + bhu] to predominate J.II,357. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhācarati: {'def': '(adhi+ a + car + a), 犯戒，犯法。 ajjhācari, 【过】。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+a+car移动+a), 犯戒，犯法。ajjhācari,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[adhi (or ati?) + ā + car] 1. to conduct oneself according to Vin.II,301; M.I,523; Miln.266. -- 2. to flirt with (perhaps to embrace) J.IV,231 (aññam-aññaṁ). pp. ajjhāciṇṇa. See also accāvadati & aticarati. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāciṇṇa: {'def': '(ajjhācarati 的【过分】) 1.多练习过。2.习惯性地作过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of ajjhācarati] habitually done Vin.II,80 sq., 301. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ajjhācarati 的【过分】) 1. 多练习过。 2. 习惯性地作过。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhācāra: {'def': '[to adhi (ati?) + ā + car] 1. minor conduct (conduct of a bhikkhu as to those minor rules not included in the Pārājika’s or Saṁghādisesa’s) Vin.I,63 (see note in Vin. Texts, I.184. -- 2. flirtation Vin.III,128 (in the Old Cy as explⁿ of avabhāsati). -- 3. sexual intercourse J.I,396; V,327 (°cara v. l. for ajjhāvara); Miln.127 (an°). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāgāre: {'def': '(adv.) [adhi + agāre, Loc. of agāra] at home, in one’s own house A.I,132 = It.109; A.II,70. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhājīva: {'def': '[adhi (ati?) + ā + jīv] too rigorous or strenuous a livelihood M.II,245 (+ adhipāṭimokkha). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāpajjati: {'def': '[adhi + ā + pad] to commit an offence, to incur, to become guilty of (Acc.) Vin.IV,237. pp. ajjhāpanna (q. v.). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāpana: {'def': '² (nt.) [ā + jhāpana fr. kṣā] burning, conflagration J.VI,311. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】教，指示。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】教，指示。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. Caus. II. of ajjheti] teaching of the sacred writ, instruction Miln.225. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāpanna: {'def': '(ajjhāpajjati 的【过分】), 犯罪过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ajjhāpajjati 的【过分】), 犯罪过。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of adhi + āpajjati] become guilty of offence D.I,245; III,43; S.II,270; A.IV,277, 280; V,178, 181. an° guiltless, innocent Vin.I,103; D.III,46; S.II,194, 269; A.V,181; Miln.401. For all passages except A.IV,277, 280, cp. ajjhopanna. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāpatti: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to ajjhāpajjati] incurring guilt Dhs.299 (an°). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāpīḷita: {'def': '[adhi + ā + pīḷita] harassed, overpowered, tormented PvA.180 (khuppipāsāya by hunger & thirst). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāruha: {'def': '(& °rūha) (adj.) [to adhi + ā + ruh] growing up over, overwhelming A.III,63 sq. = S.V,96; J.III,399. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāruhati: {'def': '(adhi + ā + ruh + a), 起来，爬上。 ajjhāruhi, 【过】。ajjhārūḷhi, 【过分】。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adhi在…上+ā+ruh上升+a), 起来，爬上。ajjhāruhi,【过】。ajjhārūḷhi,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhārūhati: {'def': '[adhi + ārohati cp. atyārohati] to rise into the air, to climb over, spread over S.I,221 = Nett 173 (= ajjhottharati SA; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred Sayings I.285). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhārūḷha: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of adhi + ā + ruh] grown up or high over J.III,399. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāsaya: {'def': '【阳】意图，安排。 ~tā,【阴】（【合】）有意图的事实。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. adhi + ā + śri, orig. hanging on, leaning on, BSk. however adhyāśaya Divy 586] intention, desire, wish, disposition, bent D.II,224 (adj.: intent on, practising); J.I,88, 90; II,352; V,382; DhsA.314, 334; PvA.88, 116, 133 (adj. dān° intent on giving alms), 168; Sdhp.219, 518. Freq. in phrase ajjhāsayânurūpa according to his wish, as he wanted PvA.61, 106, 128. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】意图，安排。ajjhāsayatā,【阴】(【合】)有意图的事实。Ajjhiṭṭha, (ajjhesati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhāsayatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to ajjhāsaya] desire, longing PvA.127 (uḷār° great desire for c. Loc.). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāsita: {'def': '[pp. of adhi + ā + śri] intent on, bent on Miln.361 (jhān°). Cp. ajjhosita & nissita. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāvadati: {'def': 'see accāvadati. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāvara: {'def': '【阳】人选。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. adhi + ā + var] surrounding; waiting on, service, retinue J.V,322, 324, 326, 327 (expl^d at all passages by parisā). Should we read ajjhācara? Cp. ajjhācāra. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】人选。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjhāvasatar: {'def': '[n. ag. to ajjhāvasati] one who inhabits D.I,63 (agāraṁ). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāvasati: {'def': '(adhi在…上+ā+vas住+a), 居住，定居，统治。ajjhāvasi,【过】。ajjhāvasitvā,【独】。【1.复.现】ajjhāvasāma。【阳.单.工.离﹐现分】ajjhāvasatā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adhi + ā + vas + a), 居住，定居。 ajjhāvasi, 【过】。ajjhāvasitvā,【独】。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[adhi + ā + vas] to inhabit (agāraṁ a house; i. e. to be settled or live the settled life of a householder) D.II,16; M.I,353; Vin.IV,224; J.I,50; Pug.57; Miln.348. -- pp. ajjhāvuttha (q. v.). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāvuttha: {'def': '(Ajjhāvasati的【过分】), 居住过，住进过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. adhyuṣita; pp. of ajjhāvasati] inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin.II,210; J.I,145; II,333; PvA.24 (°ghara); fig. (not) occupied by SnA 566 (= anosita). (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjhāya: {'def': '【阳】章。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】章。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajjhāyaka: {'def': '【阳】指导者，教师。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】指导者，教师。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. adhyāyaka, cp. ajjhayana] (a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda (mantajjhāyaka J.VI,209; SnA 192), a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious, learned person D.I,88, 120; III,94; A.I,163; III,223; Sn.140 (°kula: thus for ajjhāyakula Fsb.); Th.1, 1171; J.I,3; VI,201, 498; DA.I,247. (Page 11)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjita: {'def': '【形】曾经获得，曾经聚积并储藏，曾经聚积。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of ajjati] obtained Sdhp.98. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pp. of ajjati),【形】曾经获得，曾经聚积(obtained)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjuka: {'def': '[*Sk. arjaka] N. of a plant, Ocimum Gratissimum Vin.IV,35; DA.I,81 (all MSS. have ajjaka). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(*Sk. arjaka), 丁香罗勒(Ocimum gratissimum)，又称印度罗勒，七层塔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjukaṇṇa: {'def': '[*Sk. arjakarṇa] N. of a tree Pentaptera Tomentosa J.VI,535 (nn). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ajjuna: {'def': '[Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Gr. a)rgόs white, a)ρguros silver, Lat. argentum] the tree Pentaptera Arjuna J.VI,535; DhA.I,105 (°rukkha). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 阿见（产于热带亚洲的榄仁树属 (Terminalia Arjuna)，其特点是具涩的树皮，用于制革）。 2. 一位王子的名字。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Vedic arjuna, to raj染),【阳】1.阿见(产於热带亚洲的榄仁树属 (Terminalia Arjuna)，其特点是具涩的树皮，用於制革)。2.一位王子的名字。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjuṇho: {'def': '(adv.) [haplology fr. ajja-juṇho; see juṇhā] this moonlight night Vin.I,25; IV,80. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(haplology fr. ajja-juṇho; see juṇhā),【形】这月光之夜(this moonlight night)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajjācāra: {'def': '【阳】1.罪犯，过失。2.行房。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 罪犯，过失。 2. 行房。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajā: {'def': 'ajī,【阴】雌山羊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) a she-goat J.III,125; IV,251. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'ajī,【阴】雌山羊。(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajānana: {'def': '(°-) (nt.) [a + jānana] not knowing, ignorance (of) J.V,199 (°bhāva); VI,177 (°kāla). (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】无知。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】无知。(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajānanta: {'def': 'ajānamāna, 【现分】不知道，没有学识。(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'ajānamāna,【现分】不知道，没有学识。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajānataṁ: {'def': '(a不+jānataṁ知(【阳.单.与.属﹐现分】),不知(【阳.单.与.属﹐现分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajānaṁ: {'def': '([a不+jānaṁ知【阳.单.主﹐现分】],不知【阳.单.主﹐现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajānitvā: {'def': 'ajāniya,【独】不知道，没有注意到。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'ajāniya, 【独】不知道，没有注意到。(p4)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ajāta: {'def': '(a未+jāta生【过分】) 未生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajātasattu: {'def': '（国王名）阿迦答沙都，（古音译：）阿闍世，阿闍多设咄路', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '(a未+jāta生【过分】+sattu敌)﹐【阳】阿闍(ㄕㄜˊ)世(人名)，未生怨(未出生就已经是父王的敌人，后来受提婆达多怂恿，篡位弑父)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(a未+jāta生【过分】+sattu敌),【阳】阿闍(ㄕㄜˊ)世(人名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ajīraka: {'def': '(a + jīraka),【中】消化不良(indigestion)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [a + jīraka] indigestion J.I,404; II,181, 291; III,213, 225. (Page 10)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】消化不良。(p5)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akakkasa: {'def': '(a无+kakkasa粗暴) 【形】无粗暴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akalu: {'def': '(cp. agalu) an ointment J.IV,440 (akaluñ candanañ ca, v. l. BB aggaluṁ; C. expl^s as kālâkaluñ ca rattacandanañ ca, thus implying a blacking or dark ointment); VI,144 (°candana-vilitta; v. l. BB aggalu°); Miln.338 (°tagara-tālīsaka-lohita-candana). (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp.agalu)﹐膏药(an ointment)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akamaka: {'def': '【形】不愿意。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akampiya: {'def': '【形】固定的，坚固的。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(grd.of a-+kampati),【形】不摇动的。akampiyatta【中】不动摇、坚固性(the condition of not being shaken, stableness)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akampiyatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. akampiya, grd. of a + kampati] the condition of not being shaken, stableness Miln.354. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akaniṭṭha: {'def': 'a. [BSk. Akaniṣṭha] 阿迦膩吒(天), 色究竟(天), 有頂(天).', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'a. [BSk. Akaniṣṭha] 阿迦膩吒(天), 色究竟(天), 有頂(天).', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Akappiya: {'def': '(a不+kappiya合适),【形】不合适。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akaraṇa: {'def': '(a不+karaṇa作),【中】不作。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】非行动。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akaraṇīya: {'def': '(a不+karaṇīya作【未被】),【未被】不作。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【潜】 1. 不应该做的，不适合的。 2. 【中】不合适的行动。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【义】1.不应该做的，不适合的。2.【中】不合适的行动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akarissa: {'def': '(‹karoti) , 如果做(cond.2sg.3sg.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akaronta: {'def': '【现分】不做，不操作。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(a不+karont作【现分】),【现分】不做，不操作。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akasira: {'def': '(a无+kasira困苦),【形】无困苦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akataññū: {'def': '【形】忘恩负义。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】I.忘恩负义(a不+kataññū知恩)。II.【形】知未被作(akata未作【过分】+ññū知【形】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akathaṁkathin: {'def': '(a无+kathaṁkathin疑问【形】),【形】无疑问。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akathaṁkathā: {'def': '(ā无+kathaṁkathā疑问),【阴】无疑问。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akathinatā: {'def': '【形】不僵硬的状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akaṁsu: {'def': '(karoti‘作’的【3.复.过】)﹐他们已作。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akaṇha: {'def': '(a非+kaṇha黑暗),【形】非黑暗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akaṇika: {'def': '(a无+kaṇa糠粉+ika (形容词化)),【形】无黑痣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akaṇiṭṭha: {'def': '(a无+kaṇiṭṭha最年轻的),【形】无最年轻的，阿迦腻迦(天)，色究竟(天)，有顶(天)(=bhavagga)。Vibhv.PTS:p.126︰Pañcamatalavāsino pana ukkaṭṭhasampattikattā natthi etesaṁ kaniṭṭhabhāvoti akaniṭṭhā.(第五层住者，(个个)达到高峰，没有最年轻的状态，为‘阿迦腻迦(天) ’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akaṭa: {'def': 'akata(a未+kaṭa作),【过分】1.不做(not made)，不是人造作(not artificial)。2.非造作、自然(natural)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'akata, 【形】 1. 不做，不造作。2. 不是人造的。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + kaṭa] not made, not artificial, natural; °yūsa natural juice Vin.I,206. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akaṭayūsa: {'def': '(a非+kaṭa造作+yūsa果汁)﹐【阳】天然的汁液(natural juice)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akhaṇḍa: {'def': '(a无+khaṇḍa毁坏),【形】无毁坏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akhaṇḍaphulla: {'def': 'see khaṇḍa. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akhetta: {'def': '【中】不适当的地方，非 (福) 田。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】瘠地(barren-soil)，非(福)田。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'barren-soil: see khetta. -- In cpd. °ññu the neg. belongs to the whole: not knowing a good field (for alms) J.IV,371. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akhila: {'def': '(cp. Sk. khila), 【阳】【中】不荒废，非荒芜，非荒野。akhīlajāto, 产生荒废。c.f. khilā(荒芜)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akhāta: {'def': '(adj.) not dug: see khāta. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akiccakāra: {'def': '(a不+kicca+kāra) 【形】1.不履行自己的责任；做不应该做的。2.无效的(药) (ineffective (of medicine))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + kicca + kāra] 1. not doing one’s duty, doing what ought not to be done A.II,67; Dh.292; Miln.66; DA.I,296. -- 2. ineffective (of medicine) Miln.151. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akiccha: {'def': '(a无+kiccha困难),【形】无困难。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akilāsu: {'def': '(adj.) [a + kilāsu] not lazy, diligent, active, untiring S.I,47; V,162; J.I,109; Miln.382. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不疲倦的，活跃的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不疲倦的，活跃的。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akiriya: {'def': '(adj.) [a + kiriya] not practical, unwise, foolish J.III,530 (°rūpa = akattabba-rūpa C.); Miln.250. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a无+kiriya作【阴】),【中】直译：无作。非实用的、无智(not practical, unwise, foolish)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】非行动。~vāda, 【阳】业无果报的理论。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akiriyavāda: {'def': '【阳】业无果报的理论无作见。akiriyadiṭṭhi﹐【阴】无作见，认为业是不能产生果报，一切业都是无效的。SA.22.62./II,279.︰“Karoto na karīyati pāpan”ti gahitattā akiriyavādā.(无作论︰恶无被作，取名为无作论。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akissava: {'def': '无智者(Nettivibhāvinī, CS:p.287.︰akissavaṁ apaññanti.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'at S.I,149 is probably faulty reading for akiñcana. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akiñcana: {'def': '【形】有所无。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(a无+kiñcana任何),【形】无所有(having nothing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akka: {'def': '(梵arka),【阳】1.太阳。2.牛角瓜(Calotropis Gigantea；swallow-wort，一种大灌木)，有白色和淡紫色的花，在夏威夷用作项圈和泰国用作花圈)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 太阳。 2. 牛角瓜（一种大灌木 (Calotropis Gigantea)，具有白色和淡紫色的花，在夏威夷用作项圈和泰国用作花圈）。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. arka] N. of a plant: Calotropis Gigantea, swallow-wort M.I,429 (°assa jiyā bowstrings made from that plant).

--nāla a kind of dress material Vin.I,306 (vv. ll. agga° & akkha°). --vāṭa a kind of gate to a plantation, a movable fence made of the akka plant Vin.II,154 (cp. akkha-vāṭa). (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkamana: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. BSk. ākramaṇa Jtm 31⁵⁸] going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to J.I,62. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. BSk. ākramaṇa), 【中】走近、接近、踏在(going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkamati: {'def': '[ā + kamati, kram] to tread upon, to approach, attack J.I,7, 279; ThA.9; -- to rise Vin.III,38. -- ger. akkamma Cp. III,7². -- pp. akkanta (q. v.). (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + kam + a), 1. 行走或踏在。 2. 征服。~mi, ~mana, 【过，中】 1.走或踏在。 2. 征服。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ā+kam(梵kram)迈大步走+a), 1.行走或踏在(to tread upon, to approach)。2.攻击(attack)。akkami, 【过】。akkamma, 【独】。akkanta, 【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkandati: {'def': '[ā + kandati, krand] to lament, wail, cry S.IV,206. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā + kand + a), 悲叹，哭。~di, ~dana, 【过，中】悲叹。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ā+kand(梵krand)哭泣+a), 悲叹(to lament, wail)，哭(cry)。akkandi, akkandana,【过.中】悲叹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkanta: {'def': '[pp. of akkamati] stepped upon, mounted on A.I,8; J.I,71; Miln.152; DhA.I,200. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(akkamati 的【过分】)1.踏过，踩过。2.抑制过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'akkamati 的【过分】 1. 踏过，踩过。 2. 抑制过。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akkha: {'def': '¹ [Vedic akṣa; Av. aša; Gr. a)/cwn a(/maca ohariot with one axle); Lat. axis; Ohg. etc. ahsa, E. axle, to root of Lat. ago, Sk. aj] the axle of a wheel D.II,96; S.V,6; A.I,112; J.I,109, 192; V,155 (akkhassa phalakaṁ yathā; C.: suvaṇṇaphalakaṁ viya, i. e. shiny, like the polished surface of an axle); Miln.27 (+ īsā + cakka), 277 (atibhārena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati: the axle of the cart breaks when the load is too heavy); PvA.277. --akkhaṁ abbhañjati to lubricate the axle S.IV,177; Miln.367.

--chinna one whose axle is broken; with broken axle S.I,57; Miln.67. --bhagga with a broken axle J.V,433. --bhañjana the breaking of the axle DhA.I,375; PvA.277. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '5,等於廿格令的重量 (1.4克)。(akkha 【合】例如：visālakkha, sahassakkha 来自词素 akkhi = 眼)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ (adj.) (-°) [to akkhi] having eyes, with eyes PvA.39 (BB. rattakkha with eyes red from weeping, gloss on assumukha). Prob. akkhaṇa is connected with akkha. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(Vedic aksa),【中】感觉器官。【阳】轮轴(the axle of a wheel)。\xa0akkhachinna, akkhabhagga﹐akkhabhañjana﹐轮轴坏了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '4(Vedic aksa),【中】红果榄仁树(东印度的一种重要的乔木 (Terminalia belerica)，用其种仁可以榨油，从它的果实可提取染料和丹宁，也是「三果粉」(Triphala churna)的三种成份之一；树皮可提取树胶)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2(Vedic aksa),【中】骰子(a die)。anakkha﹐非赌徒(one who is not a gambler)。kūṭakkha﹐老千、赌棍、骗子( a false player, sharper, cheat)。akkha-dhutta,睹徒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】感觉器官。【阳】 1. 轮轴。 2. 骰子。 3. 红果榄仁树（东印度的一种重要的乔木 (Terminalia belerica)，用其种仁可以榨油，从它的果实可提取染料和丹宁，从它的树皮可提取树胶）。 4. 等于廿格令的重量 (1.4 克)。(akkha 【合】例如： visālakkha, sahassakkha 来自词素 akkhi = 眼)。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [Vedic akṣa, prob. to akṣi & Lat. oculus, “that which has eyes” i. e. a die; cp. also Lat. ālea game at dice (fr.* asclea?)] a die D.I,6 (but expl^d at DA.I,86 as ball-game: guḷakīḷa); S.I,149 = A.V,171 = Sn.659 (appamatto ayaṁ kali yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo); J.I,379 (kūṭ° a false player, sharper, cheat) anakkha one who is not a gambler J.V,116 (C.: ajūtakara). Cp. also accha³.

--dassa (cp. Sk. akṣadarśaka) one who looks at (i. e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge Vin.III,47; Miln.114, 327, 343 (dhamma-nagare). --dhutta one who has the vice of gambling D.II,348; III,183; M.III,170; Sn.106 (+ itthidhutta & surādhutta). --vāṭa fence round an arena for wrestling J.IV,81. (? read akka-). (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3(akkhi),有眼(having eyes, with eyes)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhadassa: {'def': '【阳】法官，裁判员。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. aksadarwaka),【阳】庄家，裁判员，法官(one who looks at (i. e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhadhutta: {'def': '【形】好赌。【阳】赌徒。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】好赌。【阳】赌徒(one who has the vice of gambling)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhaka: {'def': '(akkha1 + ka),【中】锁骨(the collar-bone)。adhakkhaka, 锁骨以下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[akkha¹ + ka] the collar-bone Vin.IV,213 (adhakkhakaṁ); V,216. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】锁骨。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akkhanti: {'def': '(a无+khanti忍耐),【阴】无忍耐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhara: {'def': '(Vedic aksara),【中】1.字母(alphabet)。2.固定，持久(constant, durable, lasting)。akkharaphalaka,【阳】写字的板。akkhara amaya,【阳】写作和阅读的科学。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic akṣara] constant, durable, lasting D.III,86. As tt. for one of 4 branches of Vedic learning (D.I,88) it is Phonetics which probably included Grammar, and is expl^d by sikkhā (DA.I,247 = SnA 477) ‹-› pl. nt. akkharāni sounds, tones, words. citt’akkhara of a discourse (suttanta) having variety & beauty of words or sounds (opposed to beauty of thought) A.I,72 = III,107 = S.II,267. Akkharāni are the sauce, flavour (vyañjana) of poetry S.I,38. To know the context of the a° the words of the texts, is characteristic of an Arahant Dh.352 (C. is ambiguous DhA.IV,70). Later: akkharaṁ a syllable or sound PvA.280 (called sadda in next line); akkharāni an inscription J.II,90; IV,7 (likhitāni written), 489; VI,390, 407. In Grammar: a letter KAcc. 1.

--cintaka a grammarian or versifier KhA 17; SnA 16, 23, 321. cp. 466; PvA.120. --pabheda in phrase sakkharappabheda phonology & etymology D.I,88 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca SnA 447 = DA. i.247) = A.III,223 = Sn.p. 105. --piṇḍa “word-ball”, i. e. sequence of words or sounds DhA.IV,70 (= akkharānaṁ sannipāto Dh.352). (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】字母，音节。~phalaka,【阳】写字的板。~samaya,【阳】写作和阅读的科学。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akkharikā: {'def': '(f.) a game (recognising syllables written in the air or on one’s back). D.I,7; Vin.II,10; III,180. So expl^d at DA.I,86. It may be translated “letter game”; but all Indian letters of that date were syllables. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】猜字(“letter game”, recognising syllables written in the air or on one’s back); but all Indian letters of that date were syllables)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhata: {'def': '【形】毫发无伤地，不受伤，完美的。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pp. of a + ksan转动, cp. parikkhata1),【形】毫发无伤地，不受伤(unhurt, without fault)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of a + kṣan, cp. parikkhata¹] unhurt, without fault Mhvs 19, 56 (C. niddosa). -- Acc. akkhataṁ (adv.) in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv 84⁵² (paccāgamuṁ Pāṭaliputtaṁ akkhataṁ) & Pv IV.11¹ (nessāmi taṁ Pāṭaliputtaṁ akkhataṁ); see VvA.351 & PvA.272. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkhaya: {'def': '【形】不变的，永恒的，不变质的。【中】永恒的平静。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + khaya, kṣi] not decaying, in akkhayapaṭibhāna, of unfailing skill in exposition Miln.3, 21. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a + khaya, ksi拥有),【形】不变的，不变质的(not decaying)。【中】不变。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhaṇa: {'def': '【阳】不适当的时间。akkhaṇā, 【阴】闪电。~vedhī, 【阳】射箭快如闪电，或所射出之箭只轻擦目标的箭手。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(a+khaṇa, BSk.aksaṇa),【阳】不适当的时间、非时节(wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune)。akkhaṇā,【阴】闪电。akkhaṇavedhī,【阳】射箭快如闪电，或所射出之箭只轻擦目标的箭手。aṭṭha akkhaṇā(asṭāvksaṇāh)﹐八难ㄋㄢˊ(八无暇﹐8 non conducive factors)：梵行住(brahmacariyavāsāya)有八难：如来出现於世，1此人生於地狱(nirayaṁ；narakāh)；2畜生(tiracchānayoniṁ；tirayañcah)；3饿鬼道(pettivisayaṁ；pretāh)；4长寿天(dīghāyukaṁ devanikāyaṁ；dīrghāyuso)；5生於边国无知之夷狄中(paccantimesu janapadesu paccājāto；pratyanta-janapadam)；6虽生於中国(majjhimesu janapadesu paccājāto)，然有邪见(micchādiṭṭhiko)、颠倒见(viparītadassano)；7虽生於中国，然为无慧(duppañño)、痴呆(jaḷo)、哑羊(eḷamūgo)而不能知善说、恶说之义(appaṭibalo subhāsitadubbhāsitassa atthamaññātuṁ；z梵indriya-vāikalyam)；8此人生於中国，有慧(paññavā)、无痴呆(ajaḷo)、无哑羊(aneḷamūgo)，能知善说、恶说之义(paṭibalo subhāsitadubbhāsitassa atthamaññātuṁ；梵mithyā-darwanam)，但如来不出现於世(梵tathāgatānām anutpād)。见：A.8.29.Akkhaṇa(难)。cf.：《增壹阿含42.1经》(T藏2.747a)，《中阿含124经》八难经(T藏1.613a)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[a + khaṇa, BSk. akṣaṇa AvŚ I.291 = 332] wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune. There are 9 enum^d at D.III,263; the usual set consists of 8; thus D.III,287; VvA.193; Sdhp.4 sq. See also khaṇa.

--vedhin (adj. n.) a skilled archer, one who shoots on the moment, i. e. without losing time, expl^d as one who shoots without missing (the target) or as quickly as lightning (akkhaṇa = vijju). In var. comb^ns.; mostly as durepātin a. A.I,284 (+ mahato kāyassa padāletā); II,170 sq. (id.), 202; IV,423, 425; J.II,91 (expl^d as either “avirādhita‹11›--vedhī” or “akkhaṇaṁ vuccati vijju”: one who takes and shoots his arrows as fast as lightning), III,322; IV,494 (C. expl^ns aviraddha-vedhin vijju-ālokena vijjhana‹11›--samattha p. 497). In other combⁿ at J.I,58 (akkhaṇavedhin + vālavedhin); V,129 (the 4 kinds of archers: a., vālavedhin, saddavedhin & saravedhin).

In BSk. we find akṣuṇṇavedha (a Sanskritised Pāli form, cp. Mathurā kṣuṇa = Sk. kṣaṇa) at Divy 58, 100, 442 (always with dūrevedha), where MSS. however read ak‹-› ṣuṇa°; also at Lal. Vist. 178. See Divy Index, where trslⁿ is given as “an act of throwing the spear so as to graze the mark” (Schiefner gives “Streifschuss”). -

Note. The explanations are not satisfactory. We should expect either an etym. bearing on the meaning “hitting the centre of the target” (i. e. its “eye”) (cp. E. bull’s eye), in which case a direct relation to akkha = akkhi eye would not seem improbable (cp. formation ikkhana) or an etym. like “hitting without mishap”, in which case the expression would be derived directly from ak khaṇa (see prec.) with the omission of the neg. an-; akkhaṇa in the meaning of “lightning” (J.II,91 C.) is not supported by literary evidence. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkhi: {'def': '(nt.) [to *oks, an enlarged form of *oq^u, cp. Sk. īkṣate, kṣaṇa, pratīka, anīka; Gr. o)ζse, w)/y (*ku/klwy), o)fqalmόs, prόswpon; Lat. oculus, Ags. ēowan (= E eye & wind-ow); Goth. augō. See also cakkhu & cp. akkha² & ikkhaṇika] the eye M.I,383 (ubbhatehi akkhīhi); Sn.197, 608; J.I,223, 279; V,77; VI,336; Pv.II,9²⁶ (akkhīni paggharanti: shed tears, cp. PvA.123); VvA.65 (°īni bhamanti, my eyes swim) cp. akkhīni me dhūmāyanti DhA.I,475; DhA.II,26; III,196 (°īni ummīletvā opening the eyes); Sdhp.103, 380. -- In combⁿ with sa- as sacchi & sakkhi (q. v.). As adj. (-°) akkha³ (q.v.).

--añjana eye ointment, collyrium DhA.III,354. --kūpa the socket of the eye J.IV,407. --gaṇḍa eye-protuberance, i. e. eye-brow (?) J.VI,504 (for pamukha T.). --gūtha secretion from the eye PvA.198. --gūthaka id. Sn.197 (= dvīhi akkhicchiddehi apanīta-ttaca-maṁsasadiso a°-gūthako SnA 248). --chidda the eye-hole SnA 248. --dala the eye-lid DA.I,194; ThA.259; DhsA.378. --pāta “fall of the eye”, i. e. a look, in mand° of soft looks (adj.) PvA.57. --pūra an eye-full, in akkhipūraṁ assuṁ (assu?) an eye full of tears J.VI,191. --mala dirt from the eye Pv III,5³ (= °gūtha C.). --roga eye disease DhA.I,9. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. īksate, ksaṇa, pratīka, anīka),【中】眼睛。akkhikūpa,【阳】眼窝(the socket of the eye)。akkhitārā,【阴】瞳孔。akkhidala,【中】眼睑、眼皮(the eye-lid)。akkhi-añjana, 眼药水(eye ointment, collyrium)。akkhigaṇḍa, 眼痈(eye-protuberance) 。akkhigūtha,眼屎(secretion from the eye)。akkhichidda, 眼孔(the eye-hole)。akkhimala,眼垢(dirt from the eye)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】眼睛。~kūpa,【阳】眼窝。~tārā,【阴】瞳孔。~dala,【中】眼睑，眼皮。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akkhika: {'def': '¹ (-°) (adj.) having eyes, with eyes Th.1,960 (añjan° with eyes anointed); DhA.IV,98 (aḍḍh° with half an eye, i. e. stealthily); Sdhp.286 (tamb° red-eyed). --an° having no eyes DhA.I,11. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [cp. Sk. akṣa] the mesh of a net J.I,208. --hāraka one who takes up a mesh (?) M.I,383 (corresp. with aṇḍahāraka). (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (cp. Sk. aksa), 【中】网目(the mesh of a net)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1, 【形】有眼睛(having eyes, with eyes)。añjanakkhika,眼油( with eyes anointed)。aḍḍhakkhika,半眼(暗地里)(with half an eye, i. e. stealthily)。tambakkhika, 红眼(red-eyed). anakkhika, 无眼(having no eyes)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhin: {'def': '(= akkhika1), 【形】有眼睛。mandakkhin,柔眼的(softeyed)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) = akkhika J.III,190 (mand° softeyed); Vv 32³ (tamb° red-eyed); DhA.I,11. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkhitta: {'def': '² (adj.) [BSk ākṣipta Divy 363, pp. of ā + kṣip] hit, struck, thrown J.III,255 (= ākaḍḍhita C.). (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】没被搅扰，丢掉。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2(BSk āksipta, pp. of ā + ksip投﹑抛), 【形】打击、丢掉(hit, struck, thrown)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(a+khitta搅扰),【形】没搅扰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ see khitta. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkhobbha: {'def': '(adj.) [a + kṣubh, see khobha] not to be shaken, imperturbable Miln.21. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkhobha: {'def': '【形】不易受搅扰的。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不易受搅扰的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhobhana: {'def': '(adj) = akkhobbha J.V,322 (= khobhetun na sakkhā C.). (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkhobhinī: {'def': 'akkhohinī,【阴】1.一个有四十二个零的数位。2.一个拥有 109,350 个步兵、 65,610 个骑兵、21,870 个象兵和 21,870 个战车的军队。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'akkhohinī,【阴】 1. 一个有四十二个零的数字。 2. 一个拥有 109,350个步兵、 65,610 个骑兵、 21,870 个象兵和 21,870 个战车的军队。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akkhohiṇī: {'def': '(f.) [= akkhobhiṇī] one of the highest numerals (1 followed by 42 ciphers, Childers) J.V,319; VI,395. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkhāna: {'def': '(Sk. ākhyāna),【中】报告，讲述者(one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story-teller)。有时读作：ākhyāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. ākhyāna] telling stories, recitation; tale, legend D.I,6 (= DA.I,84: Bhārata-Rāmāyanādi); III,183; M.I,503; III,167; Sdhp. 237. -- preaching, teaching Nd¹ 91 (dhamm°). The 5^th Veda J.V,450. (vedam akkhānapañcamaṁ; C: itihāsapañcamaṁ vedacatukkaṁ). -- The spelling ākhyāna also occurs (q. v.). (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkhāta: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of akkhāti] announced, proclaimed, told, shown A.I,34 (dur°); II,195; IV,285, 322; V,265, 283; Sn.172, 276, 595, 718. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pp. of akkhāti),已宣布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(akkhāti 的【过分】)。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akkhātar: {'def': 'one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story-teller S.I,11, 191; III,66; Sn.167. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】讲述者(one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story-teller)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhāti: {'def': '(ā + khā + a), 宣布，告诉，声明。 akkhāsi, 【过】。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + khyā, Idg. *seq^u; cp. Sk. ākhyāti, Lat. inquam, Gr. e)nnέpw, Goth. saihvan, Ger. sehen etc. See also akkhi & cakkhu] to declare, announce, tell Sn.87, 172; imper. akkhāhi Sn.988, 1085; aor. akkhāsi Sn.251, 504, 1131 (= ācikkhi etc. Nd² 465); fut. akkhissati Pv IV.1⁶³; cond. akkhissaṁ Sn.997; J.VI,523. -- Pass. akkhāyati to be proclaimed, in phrase aggaṁ a. to be deemed chief or superior, to be first, to excel Miln.118, 182 (also in BSk. agram ākhyāyate M Vastu III,390); ger. akkheyya to be pronounced S.I,11; It.53. -- pp. akkhāta (q. v.). -- Intensive or Frequentative is ācikkhati. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ā向+khāyati‹khyā看起来；cp. Sk. ākhyāti,),宣布，讲述，声明(to declare, announce, tell)。Akkhāsi(= ācikkhi),【3.单.过】。Akkhāhi,【2.单.命】。Akkhāta,【过分】。akkhāyati被讲述是,【被】。akkhissati , 【未】。akkhissaṁ, 【条】。ācikkhati, Intensive or Frequentative.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhātu: {'def': 'akkhāyī,【阳】陈述的人，教士。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'akkhāyī,【阳】陈述的人，教士。(p2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akkhāyika: {'def': '(adj.) relating, narrating J.III,535; lokakkhāyikā kathā talk about nature-lore D.I,8; Miln.316. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】讲述(relating, narrating)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkhāyin: {'def': '(adj.) telling, relating, announcing S.II,35; III,7; J.III,105. (Page 3)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】讲述(telling, relating, announcing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkocchi: {'def': '(akkosati 的【过】)。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(akkosati 的【过】)已臭骂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkodha: {'def': '(a无+kodha愤怒【阳】),【阳】无愤怒。%bAkkodhana (a无+kodhana愤怒【形】),【形】无愤怒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkosa: {'def': '[ā + kruś = kruñc, see kuñca & koñca²; to sound, root kṛ, see note on gala] shouting at, abuse, insult, reproach, reviling Sn.623; Miln.8 (+ paribhāsa); SnA 492; ThA.256; PvA.243; DhA.II,61.

--vatthu always as dasa a°-vatthūni 10 bases of abuse, 10 expressions of cursing J.I,191; SnA 364, 467; DhA.I,212; IV,2. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】侮辱，臭骂，责备。~ka, 【阳】侮辱的人。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ā向+[kruś叱=kruñc ] ),【阳】叱(ㄔˋ),骂。%bAkkosati (参考 [ akkosa叱骂]), 叱(ㄔˋ),骂(【单，叁，过】akkocchi)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ā+kruw = kruñc, see kuñca & koñca2),【阳】侮辱(abuse)，臭骂(shouting at)，责备(insult, reproach)。akkosavatthu，责备事。Dasa akkosavatthūni，十种责备事。(Vin.V,139; J I.191; SnA 364, 467; DhA I.212; IV.2.)。akkosantaṁ na paccakkosati, rosantaṁ na paṭirosati, bhaṇḍantaṁ na paṭibhaṇḍati.(被骂而不反骂，被瞋怒而不报以瞋怒，被议论而不反以争论。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akkosaka: {'def': '【阳】【形】侮辱的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [from last] one who abuses, scolds or reviles, + paribhāsaka A.II,58; III,252; IV,156; V,317; PvA.251. (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkosati: {'def': '(ā + kus + a), 臭骂，辱骂，责骂。akkosi, 【过】。akkositvā,【独】。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ā+kus(梵kruw)大叫+a), 臭骂，辱骂，责骂。akkosi,【过】。akkositvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[to krus see akkosa] to scold, swear at, abuse, revile J.I,191; II,416; III,27; DhA.I,211; II,44. Often comb^d with paribhāsati, e. g. Vin.II,296; DhA.IV,2; PvA.10. -- aor. akkocchi Dh.3; J.III,212 (= akkosi DhA.I,43. Der. wrongly fr. krudh by KAcc. VI,417; cp. Franke, Einh. Pāli-gramm. 37, and Geiger, P. Gr. § 164). --pp. akkuṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 2)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkula: {'def': '(adj.) [= ākula] confused, perplexed, agitated, frightened Ud.5 (akkulopakkula and akkulapakkulika). See ākula. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akkuṭṭha: {'def': '(akkosati 的【过分】) 已臭骂(being reviled, scolded, railed at)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(akkosati 的【过分】)。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [pp. of akkosati] 1. (adj.) being reviled, scolded, railed at Sn.366 (= dasahi akkosavatthūhi abhisatto SnA 364); J.VI,187. -- 2. (nt.) reviling, scolding, swearing at; in combⁿ akkuṭṭha-vandita Sn.702 (= akkosa-vandana SnA 492) Th.2, 388 (explⁿ ThA.256 as above). (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akosalla: {'def': '【形】不善的，不善巧的。akosallasambhūta，【形】不善巧所生的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akovida: {'def': '(a不+kovida熟知),【形】不熟知，不聪明的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不聪明的。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akukkucca: {'def': '(a无+kukkucca错误作),【形】无错误作。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akuppa: {'def': '(a不+kuppa(‹kup使激动)‘动摇’的【未被】),【未被】不动摇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + kuppa, grd. of kup, cp. BSk. akopya M Vastu III,200] not to be shaken, immovable; sure, steadfast, safe Vin.I,11 (akuppā me ceto-vimutti) = S.II,239; Vin.II,69; IV,214; D.III,273; M.I,205, 298; S.II,171; A.III,119, 198; Miln.361. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a=kuppa﹐grd. of kup, cp. BSk. akopya),【形】不动的(not to be shaken)，不为所动(immovable)。(AA.5.95.)：akuppanti arahattaṁ(不动：阿罗汉(的状态)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】坚定的，不为所动。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akuppadhamma: {'def': '不动法者。Pug.︰Katamo ca puggalo akuppadhammo? Idhekacco puggalo lābhī hoti rūpasahagatānaṁ vā arūpasahagatānaṁ vā samāpattīnaṁ. So ca kho nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī; yatthicchakaṁ yadicchakaṁ yāvaticchakaṁ samāpajjatipi vuṭṭhātipi. Aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ tassa puggalassa pamādamāgamma tā samāpattiyo kuppeyyuṁ--ayaṁ vuccati puggalo “akuppadhammo”. Sabbepi ariyapuggalā ariye vimokkhe akuppadhammā.(什么人是‘不动法者’呢？在这里有一种人是得到诸色俱行或无色俱行定行者，他既是随欲得、容易得、顺利得，又能在喜欢的地方、喜欢的方法及喜欢的时间(随意)入定和出定。对於那个人来说，因为放逸的原因，那些定会摇动，这种情况不会有机会，这个人被称为：「不动法者」。所有的圣人在圣解脱中都是不动法者。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akuppatā: {'def': '【阴】不动性(“state of not being shaken”，特别指‘涅盘’)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. last] “state of not being shaken”, surety, safety; Ep. of Nibbāna Th.1, 364. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akusala: {'def': '恶,不善', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【中】1.孽，罪。2.坏行为。【形】不善的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(a不+kusala善),【形】【中】不善。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 孽，罪。 2. 坏行为。【形】不善的。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akutobhaya: {'def': '(a无+kuto从何处?+bhaya恐惧),【形】无所恐惧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) see ku°. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】诸方皆安全。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】诸方皆安全。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akuṭila: {'def': '【形】正直的，诚实的，不弯曲的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】正直的，诚实的，不弯曲的。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akāca: {'def': '(adj.) [a + kāca] pure, flawless, clear D.II,244; Sn.476; J.V,203. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=akācin)(a+kāca),【形】无瑕的(flawless, not of glass or quartz)。=akācin【形】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无瑕的，纯洁。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akācin: {'def': '(adj.) = akāca Vv 60¹. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) proposes reading akkācin (= Sk. arka-arcin shining as the sun), but VvA.253 expl^s by niddosa, and there is no v. l. to warrant a misreading. (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Akāla: {'def': '(a非+kāla时宜),【阳】不适当的时间，不恰当的时机，非时，不合时，不及时，非暂时。【形】非时宜，不合时节。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】不适当的时间。【形】过时的。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akālika: {'def': '(a无+kālika时),不待时的，不受时间限制的，不迟滞的，即时的。(无时的,Vism.216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akāliko: {'def': '即时的, 不迟滞的,不受时间限制的[无时的,Vism.(清净道论底本--P.216)]', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Akāmaka: {'def': '【形】不愿意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Akāsi: {'def': '(karoti 的【3.单.过】)，做了，造作了，或运行了。tathā akāsi﹐遵照办理。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(karoti 的【过】)，做了，造作了，或运行了。(p1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Akāsiya: {'def': '(adj. -n.) [a + kāsika?] “not from the Kāsī-country” (?); official name of certain tax-gatherers in the king’s service J.VI,212 (akāsiya-saṅkhātā rāja-purisā C.). (Page 1)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ala: {'def': '【阳，中】螃蟹等的螯。(p40)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [alaṁ adv. as adj.] enough, only in neg. anala insufficient, impossible M.I,455; J.II,326 = IV.471. (Page 78)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(=aḷa),【阳】【中】1.螃蟹等的螯(the claw of a crab)。2.指甲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2,【形】足够。【反】anala﹐不够(insufficient)，不可能(impossible)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ freq. spelling for aḷa. (Page 78)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alagadda: {'def': '[Der. unknown. In late Sk. alagarda is a watersnake] a kind of snake M.I,133 = DA.I,21; DhA.IV,132 (°camma, so read for T. alla-camma, vv. ll. alanda° & alandu°). (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】蛇。(p40)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】蛇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alagga: {'def': '【形】没卡住的，无执着的。(p40)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】没卡住的，无执著的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of laggati] not stuck or attached Nd² 107 (also alaggita); alaggamāna (ppr.) id. DhA.III,298. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alaggana: {'def': '(nt.) [a + laggana] not hanging on anything, not being suspended DA.I,180. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】无执着。(p40)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】无执著。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alajjī: {'def': '【形】不知羞耻的，不害怕罪的。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不知羞耻的，不害怕罪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alakka: {'def': '【阳】患有狂犬病的狗。(p40)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】患有狂犬病的狗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alakkhika: {'def': '【形】不吉利的，不幸的。(p40)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& Alakkhīka) (adj.) [a + lakkhika] unfortunate unhappy, of bad luck Vin.III,23; J.III,259. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不吉利的，不幸的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alakkhī: {'def': '【阴】不幸，坏运气。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [a + lakkhi] bad luck, misfortune Th.1, 1123. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】不幸，坏运气。(p40)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Alamba: {'def': '(adj.) [a + lamba] not hanging down, not drooping, short J.V,302; VI,3 (°tthaniyo not flabby: of a woman’s breasts cp. alamb’ordhva-stanī Suśruta I.371). (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alameva: {'def': '(alaṁ适当的+eva调强语气), 适当的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alanda: {'def': '& Alandu see alagadda. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alasa: {'def': '【形】不作事的，懒惰的。 ~tā, 【阴】怠惰，懒惰。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + lasa] idle, lazy, slack, slothful, languid S.I,44, 217; Sn.96 (= jāti-alaso SnA 170); J.IV,30; Dh.280 (= mahā-alaso DhA.III,410). Opp. analasa vigorous, energetic S.I,44; D.III,190 (dakkha +); Vin.IV,211; Nd² 141 (id.). (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a无+lasa),【形】不作事的，懒惰的。alasatā,【阴】怠惰，懒惰。alasassa kuto sippaṁ﹐懒惰的人哪会有学问技能？(alasassa‹alasa, a.m.Gen.sg.转作名词「懒惰者」，属格配合be动词(此处省略)可表达「拥有」。注意：所有之物(此处为sippaṁ)要取主格。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alasaka: {'def': '【中】消化不良(indigestion)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】消化不良。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Alasatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. alasa] sloth, laziness; only in neg. analasatā zeal, industry VvA.229. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alassa: {'def': '(nt.) at S.I,43 is spurious spelling for ālassa idleness, sloth; v. l. BB ālasya. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alattaka: {'def': '【中】紫胶。 ~kata, 【形】上了漆的，以紫胶粉饰的。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. alaktaka] lac, a red animal dye J.IV,114 (°pāṭala); DhA.II,174; IV,197. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】紫胶(lac)。alattakata,【形】上了漆的，以紫胶粉饰的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alattha: {'def': '1.[labhati得] 的【3.单.过】。2.【形】得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alaŋ: {'def': '【无】够了！做完了！停止！【形】能干，适当的。~kammaniya,【形】适合的。~pateyyā, 【阴】成熟的女人。~vacanīyā, 【阴】 1. 听懂他人说话的女人，2. 不可劝诫的。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Alaṁ: {'def': '(indecl.) [Vedic araṁ. In meaning 1. alaṁ is the expanded continuation of Vedic araṁ, an adv. Acc. of ara (adj.) suitable; fitly, aptly rightly fr. ṛ Cp. aṇṇava, appeti, ara. In meaning 2. alaṁ is the same as are] emphatic particle 1. in affirmative sentences: part. of assurance & emphasis = for sure, very much (so), indeed, truly. Note. In connection with a Dat. or an infin. the latter only apparently depend upon alaṁ, in reality they belong to the syntax of the whole sentence (as Dat. or inf. absolute). It is customary however (since the practice of the Pāli grammarians) to regard them as interdependent and interpret the construction as “fit for, proper” (= yuttaṁ Pāli Com.), which meaning easily arises out of the connotation of alaṁ, e.g. alam eva kātuṁ to be sure, this is to be done = this is proper to be done. In this sense (c. Dat.) it may also be comp^d. with Vedic araṁ c. Dat. -- (a) (abs.) only in comb^n. with Dat. or inf. (see c. & Note above). -- (b.) (°-) see cpds. -- (c.) with Dat. or infin.: alaṁ antarāyāya for certain an obstacle M.I,130 (opp. nâlaṁ not at all); alaṁ te vippaṭisārāya you ought to feel sorry for it Vin.II,250; alaṁ vacanāya one says rightly S.II,18; alaṁ hitāya untold happiness DhA.II,41. -- ito ce pi so bhavaṁ Gotamo yojana sate viharati alam eva . . . upasaṅkamituṁ even if he were 100 miles from here, (surely) even so (i. e. it is fit or proper even then) one must go to him D.I,117 (expl^d. at DA.I,288 by yuttam eva = it is proper); alam eva kātuṁ kalyāṇaṁ indeed one must do good = it is appropriate to do good Pv.II,9²³ (= yuttaṁ PvA.122); alaṁ puññāni kātave “come, let us do meritorious works” Vv 44¹⁵ (= yuttaṁ VvA.191). ‹-› 2. in negative or prohibitive sentences: part. of disapprobation reproach & warning; enough! have done with! fie! stop! alas! (etc. see are). -- (a) (abs.) enough: nâlaṁ thutuṁ it is not enough to praise Sn.217; te pi na honti me alaṁ they are not enough for me Pv.I,6³. -- (b) with Voc.: alaṁ Devadatta mā te rucci saṅghabhedo “look out D. or take care D. that you do not split up the community” Vin.II,198; alaṁ Vakkali kin te iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena . . . S.III,120. -- (c) enough of (with Instr.): alaṁ ettakena enough of this, so much of that Miln.18; alam me Buddhena enough for me of the Buddha = I am tired of the B. DhA.II,34.

--attha (adj.) “quite the thing”, truly good, very profitable, useful D.II,231; M.II,69 (so read for alamatta); A.II,180; Th.1, 252; J.I,401 (so read for °atta). --ariya truly genuine, right noble, honourable indeed, only in °ñāṇa-dassana [cp. BSk. alamārya-jñāna-darśana Lal V.309, 509] Vin.I,9; A.III,64, 430; V,88; J.I,389 (cp. ariya). --kammaniya (quite or thoroughly) suitable Vin.III,187. --pateyya: see the latter. --vacanīyā (f.) a woman who has to be addressed with “alaṁ” (i. e. “fie”), which means that she ceases to be the wife of a man & returus into her parental home Vin.III,144, cp. 274 (Bdhgh’s. expl^n.). --samakkhātar one who makes sufficiently clear It.107. --sājīva one who is thoroughly fit to associate with his fellow A.III,81. --sāṭaka “curse-coat”, one who curses his waist-coat (alaṁ sāṭaka!) because of his having eaten too much it will not fit; an over-eater; one of the 5 kinds of gluttons or improper eaters as enum^d. at DhA.IV,16 = DhsA.404. (Page 78)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】够了！做完了！停止！【形】能干，适当的。alaṁkammaniya,【形】适合的。alaṁpateyyā,【阴】成熟的女人。alaṁvacanīyā,【阴】1.听懂他人说话的女人，2.不可劝诫的。alamattha﹐【形】有用的(“quite the thing”, truly good, very profitable, useful (so read for alamatta))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alaṁkaraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [alaṁ + karaṇa, fr. alaṅkaroti] doing up, fitting out, ornamentation J.I,60. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alaṁkaraṇaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. alaṅkaraṇa] adorning, embellishing, decorating DhA.I,410. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alaṁkaroti: {'def': '(alaṁ足够+karoti作), 装饰。【过分】alaṁkata。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[alaṁ + karoti, Vedic araṅkaroti] to make much of i. e. to adorn, embellish, decorate J.I,60; III,189; VI, 368. ger. °karitvā DhA.I,410; PvA.74. -- pp. alaṅkata. -- Caus. alaṅkārāpeti to cause to be adorned J.I,52. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alaṁkata: {'def': '[pp. of alaṅkaroti] 1. “made too much”, made much of, done up, adorned, fitted out Dh.142 (= vatthâbharaṇa-paṭimaṇḍita DhA.III,83); Pv.II,3⁶; Vv 1¹; J.III,392; IV,60. -- 2. “done enough” (see alaṁ, use with Instr.), only neg. analaṅkata in meaning “insatiate” S.I,15 (kāmesu). (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alaṁkāra: {'def': '[fr. alaṅkaroti, cp. Vedic araṅkṛti] “getting up” i. e. fitting ont, ornament, decoration; esp. trinkets, onaments D.III,190; A.III,239; 263 sq.; J.VI,368; PvA.23, 46, 70 (-° adj. adorned with), 74; Sdhp.249. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alaṅkaraṇa: {'def': '【中】 1. 装饰。 2. 整理，包好。(p40)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】1.装饰。2.整理，包好。alaṅkārakāraka, 装饰品的制造者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alaṅkaroti: {'def': '(alaṁ+kar行+o), 装饰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(alaŋ + kar + o), 装饰。(p40)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Alaṅkata: {'def': '(alaṅkaroti 的【过分】), 已装饰。【形】整理的，束起的，包好的。(p40)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(alaṅkaroti 的【过分】),已装饰。【形】整理的，束起的，包好的。0', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alaṅkāra: {'def': '【阳】1.装饰，2.饰物。3.璎珞(以玉编缀成串，挂在身上作装饰)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 装饰，2. 饰物。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ali: {'def': '【阳】1.蜜蜂，2.蠍子(scorpion)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 蜜蜂，2. 蝎子。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Alika: {'def': '【中】谎话，谎言。【形】虚伪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. alīka] contrary, false, untrue S.I,189; J.III,198; VI,361; Miln.26, 99. -- nt. °ṁ a lie, falsehood Dh.264.

--vādin one who tells a lie, a liar Dh.223 = VvA.69 (has alīka°); J.II,4; SnA 478 (for abhūta-vādin Sn.661). (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】谎话，谎言。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Alikavādin: {'def': '(alika虚伪+vādin说【形】),【形】说虚伪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alla: {'def': '【形】潮湿的，湿气，绿色的，未成熟的，新鲜的。 ~dāru, 【中】绿林，未枯干的树。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】潮湿的，湿气，绿色的，未成熟的，新鲜的。alladāru,【中】绿林，未枯乾的树。allavattha, 潮湿的衣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (only °-) [Vedic ārdra, to Gr. a]ρdw moisten, a]ρda dirt] -- 1. moist, wet M.III,94 (°mattikā-puñja a heap of moist clay; may be taken in meaning 2). -- 2. fresh (opp. stale), new; freshly plucked, gathered or caught, viz.°âvalepana see adda³; °kusamuṭṭhi freshly plucked grass A.V,234 = 249; °gomaya fresh dung A.V,234; DhA.I,377; °camma living skin Vism.195; °tiṇa fresh grass DA.I,77; PvA.40; °dārūni green sticks J.I,318; °madhu fresh honey DhA.II,197; °maṁsa-sarīra a body of living flesh DhA.II,51 = IV,166; °rasa fresh-tasting DhA.II,155; °rohita-maccha fresh fish J.III,333. ‹-› 3. wet = with connotation of clean (through being washed), freshly washed, °kesa with clean hair PvA.82 (sīsaṁ nahātvā allakesa); usually comb^d. with allavattha with clean clothes (in an ablution; often as a sign of mourning) Ud.14, 91; DhA.IV,220; or with odāta vattha (id.) J.III,425. °pāṇi with clean hand Pv.II,9⁹ (= dhotapāṇi PvA.116). [For analla-gatta at S.I,183 better read, with ibid 169, an-allīna-gatta. For allacamma at DhA.IV,132 alagadda-camma, with the v.l., is preferable]. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Allakappa: {'def': '遮罗颇(地名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Allakappaka: {'def': '(Allakappa 遮罗颇+ka (形容词化)),【形】遮罗颇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Allika: {'def': '(?) [either from alla = allikaṁ nt. in meaning defilement, getting soiled by (-°), or from allīyati = alliyakaṁ, a der. fr. ger. alliya clinging to, sticking to. The whole word is doubtful.] only in cpd. (kāma-) sukh’allik’ânuyoga given to the attachment to sensual joys Vin.I,10; D.III,113, 130; S.IV,330; V,421; Nett 110. (Page 80)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Allāpa: {'def': '【阳】交谈。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. ālāpa; ā + lāpa] conversation, talk; only in cpd. °sallāpa conversation (lit. talking to & fro or together) J.I,189; Miln.15; VvA.96; PvA.86. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】交谈。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Allīna: {'def': '[pp. of allīyati; Sk. ālīna] (a) sticking to, adhering or adhered to, clinging M.I,80; A.V,187; Nd² under nissita (in form asita allīna upagata). -- (b.) soiled by (-°), dirtied A.II,201. --anallīna “to which nothing sticks”, i. e. pure, undefiled, clean S.I,169 (id. p. on p. 183 reads analla: see alla). Cp. ālaya. (Page 80)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Allīyati的【过分】), 已附著，已黏紧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Allīyana: {'def': '【中】粘附，执着的。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】黏附，执著的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Allīyati: {'def': '(a+lī执著+ya), 黏附於，黏住( to cling to, stick to, adhere to; to covet)。【过分】allīyita。【不】allīyituṁ(illīyituṁ)。【过分】allīna. Caus. alliyāpeti [cp. Sk. ālāpayati, but B.Sk. allīpeti; pp. allīpita; pass. allīpīyate] to make stick, to to bring near to (c. Acc. or Loc.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(a + lī + ya), 黏附于，黏住。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ā + līyati, lī, līyate, layate] to cling to, stick to, adhere to (in both senses, good or bad); to covet. -- (a) lit. kesā sīsaṁ allīyiṁsu the hair stuck to the head J.I,64; khaggo lomesu allīyi the sword stuck in the hair J.I,273. -- (b) fig. to covet, desire etc.: in idiomatic phrase allīyati (S.III,190 v. l.; T. ālayati) kelāyati vanāyati (S.III,190 v.l.; T. manāyati; M.I,260 T. dhanāyati, but v.l. p. 552 vanāyati) mamāyati “to caress dearly & be extremely jealous of” (c. Acc.) at M.I,260 & S.III,190. ‹-› J.IV,5; V,154 (allīyituṁ, v.l. illīyituṁ); DhsA.364 (vanati bhajati a); pp. allīna -- Caus. alliyāpeti [cp. Sk. ālāpayati, but B.Sk. allīpeti M Vastu III,144; pp. allīpita ibid. I.311; III,408; pass. allīpīyate III,127.] to make stick, to to bring near to (c. Acc. or Loc.) J.II,325 (hatthiṁ mahābhittiyan alliyāpetvā); IV,392 (sīsena sīsaṁ alliyāpetvā). (Page 80)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alobha: {'def': '【阳】无私欲，无贪。《阿毘达摩义广释》 (Vibhv.CS:p.110)：Lobhappaṭipakkho alobho, so ārammaṇe cittassa alaggatālakkhaṇo muttabhikkhu viya.(贪的相反的，为‘无贪’，他在所缘心的不不执著状态，如已解脱的比丘一样。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】无私欲，无贪。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Alola: {'def': 'alolupa, 【形】不妄羡的，不受欲望所分心。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + lola] undisturbed, not distracted (by desires), not wavering: of firm resolution, concentrated Sn.65 (= nillolupa Nd² 98; = rasavisesesu anākula SnA 118). (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'alolupa,【形】不妄羡的，无贪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aloma: {'def': '(adj.) [a + loma] not hairy (upon the body) J.VI,457. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aloṇika: {'def': '(adj.) [a + loṇika] not salted J.III,409; VvA.184. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alpa: {'def': '【梵】一，小，少，少分，尟，尠，减，无，短，短促。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aludda: {'def': '(a无+ludda凶暴),【形】无凶暴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aluddha: {'def': '(a未+luddha贪(pp),【过分】未贪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aluḷita: {'def': '(adj.) [a + luḷita, pp. of lul] umoved, undisturbed Miln.383. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alābha: {'def': '【阳】损失，失利。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(a无+lābha得),【阳】无得，失利。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alābhaka: {'def': '[a + labhaka] not getting, loss, detriment Vin.III,77. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alābu: {'def': '[Sk. alābū f.] a long white gourd, Cucurbita Lagenaris M.I,80 (tittaka°), 315 (id.); PvA.47 (id.); DhsA.405. -- See also alāpu. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alālā: {'def': '(indecl.) [a + lālā interjection fr. sound root *lal, see etym. under are] “not saying lā lā” i. e. not babbling, not dumb, in °mukha not (deaf &) dumb SnA 124 (= aneḷamūga of Sn.70). (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Alāpu: {'def': 'alābu, 【中】长白葫芦。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [= alābu, with p for b: so Trenckner Notes 62¹⁶] a gourd, pumpkin Dh.149 (= DhA.III,112; vv. ll. alābu & alābbu). (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'alābu,【中】长白葫芦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Alāta: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. alāta, related to Lat. altāre altar, adoleo to burn] a firebrand A.II,95 (chava° a burning corpse, see chava); J.I,68; Pug.36; DhA.III,442. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】火把。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】火把。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Alīna: {'def': '(a未+līna执著【过分】),【过分】不执著。【形】不偷懒的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不偷懒的，活跃的。(p41)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Alīnatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. of alīna] open mindedness, prudence, sincerity J.I,366. (Page 79)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amacca: {'def': '【阳】1.智囊团，枢密院官员。2.同事，随从(ㄗㄨㄥˋ)。mittamacca,【阳】朋友与同事。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 智囊团，枢密院官员。 2. 同事。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic amātya (only in meaning “companion”), adj. formation fr. amā an adverbial Loc.-Gen. of pron. 1^st person, Sk. ahaṁ = Idg. *emo (cp. Sk. m-ama), meaning “(those) of me or with me”, i. e. those who are in my house] 1. friend, companion, fellow-worker, helper, esp. one who gives his advice, a bosom-friend It.73; J.VI,512 (sahajātā amaccā); Pv.II,6²⁰ (a °- paricārikā welladvising friends as company or around him). Freq. in comb^n. with mitta as mitt’âmaccā, friends & colleagues D.III,189--90; S 190 = A.II,67; PvA.29; or with ñātī (ñāti-sālohitā intimate friends & near-relations), mittâmaccā ñātisālohitā Vin.II,126; Sn.p. 104 (= mittā ca kammakarā ca SnA 447); mittā vā amaccā vā ñātī vā sālohitā vā A.I,222; PvA.28; amaccā ñāti-saṅghā ca A.I,152. ‹-› 2. Especially a king’s intimate friend, king’s favourite, confidant J.I,262; PvA.73 (°kula), 74 (amaccā ca purohito ca), 81 (sabba-kammika amacca), 93; and his special adviser or privy councillor, as such distinguished from the official ministers (purohita, mahāmatta, pārisajja); usually comb^d. with pārisajjā (pl.) viz. D.I,136 (= piya-sahāyaka DA.I,297, but cp. the foll. expl^n. of pārisajjā as “sesā āṇatti-karā”); Vin.I,348; D.III,64 (amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā); A.I,142 (catunnaṁ mahārājānaṁ a. pārisajjā). See on the question of ministers in general Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 93, 164 & Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India pp. 106--120. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amagga: {'def': '(a非+magga道),【阳】非道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amahaggata: {'def': '(a未+maha大+gata至【过分】),【过分】未大至。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amajja: {'def': '【中】不陶醉的。amajjapa,【形】不喝酒的人，戒酒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[etym.?] a bud J.V,416 (= makula C.). (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】不陶醉的。 ~pa, 【形】不喝酒的人，戒酒。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amajjapāyaka: {'def': '[a + majja + pāyaka, cp. Sk. amadyapa] one who abstains from intoxicants, a teetotaler J.II,192. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amala: {'def': '【形】纯粹的，无瑕疵的，无过失的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + mala] without stain or fault J.V,4; Sdhp.246, 591, 596. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】纯粹的，无瑕疵的，无过失的。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amama: {'def': '【形】不自私的，无渴望的。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + mama, Gen. of ahaṁ, pron. 1^st person, lit. “not (saying: this is) of me”] not egotistical, unselfish Sn.220 (+ subbata), 777; J.IV,372 (+ nirāsaya); VI,259 (= mamāyana-taṇhā-rahita C.); Pv IV.1³⁴ (= mamaṁkāravirahita PvA.230); Mhvs 1, 66, comb^d. with nirāsa (free from longing), at Sn.469 = 494; Ud.32; J.IV,303; VI,259. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不自私的，无渴望的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amanasikāra: {'def': '(a无+manasikāra作意),【阳】无作意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amanussa: {'def': '【阳】1.非人，妖怪，鬼，2.神。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 非人，妖怪，鬼，2. 神。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[a + manussa] a being which is not human, a fairy demon, ghost, god, spirit, yakkha Vin.I,277; D.II,116; S.I,91, J.I,99; Dhs.617; Miln.207; DhsA.319; DhA.I,13 (°pariggahīta haunted); PvA.216. -- Cp. amānusa. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amanussika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. amanussa] belonging to or caused by a spirit Vin.I,202, 203 (°âbādha being possessed by a demon). (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amanāpa: {'def': '(a不+manāpa中意),【形】不中意(manāpa中意的【反义字】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amara: {'def': '【形】不朽的，不死的。【阳】神。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + mara from mṛ] not mortal, not subject to death Th.1, 276; Sn.249 (= amara-bhāva -patthanatāya pavatta-kāya-kilesa SnA 291); J.V,80 (= amaraṇa-sabhāva), 218; Dāvs.V,62. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不朽的，不死的。【阳】神。Vbh.356.︰#887. Tattha katamo amaravitakko? Dukkarakāritāpaṭisaṁyutto vā diṭṭhigatapaṭisaṁyutto vā gehasito takko vitakko micchāsaṅkappo-- ayaṁ vuccati “amaravitakko”.(什么叫做‘不死寻’？使做难做的相关，或邪见相关的事，进行与居家生活有关联的1寻、2寻思、3邪思惟，这称为‘不死寻’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amaratta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. amara] immortality J.V,223 (= devatta C.). (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amarā: {'def': '【阴】鳗鱼。amarāvikkhepa,【阳】鳗之蠕动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】鳗鱼。 ~vikkhepa, 【阳】鳗之蠕动。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(?) a kind of slippery fish, an eel (?) Only in expression amarā-vikkhepika eel-wobbler, one who practices eel-wriggling, fr. °vikkhepa “oscillation like the a. fish”. In English idiom “a man who sits on the fence” D.I,24; M.I,521; Ps.I,155. The expl^n. given by Bdhgh at DA.I,115 is “amarā nāma maccha-jāti, sā ummujjana-nimmujjan-ādi vasena . . gahetuṁ na sakkoti” etc. This meaning is not beyond doubt, but Kern’s expl^n. Toev. 71 does not help to clear it up. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amassuka: {'def': '(adj.) [a + massu + ka] beardless J.II,185. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amata: {'def': '² (adj.) [see amata¹] belonging to Amṛta = ambrosial Sn.452 = S.I,189 (amatā vācā = amata-sadisā sādubhāvena SnA 399: “ambrosial”), 960 (gacchato amataṁ disaṁ = nibbānaṁ, taṁ hi amatan ti tathā niddisitabbato disā cā ti SnA 572). Perhaps also at It.46 = 62 (amataṁ dhātuṁ = ambrosial state or Amṛta as dhātu). (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (a无+mata mar(梵mr)死【过分】；梵amrta ),【中】无死。amatandada,【形】带来不死境。amatapada,【中】达到无死。amatamagga,【阳】导致不死之道。amatadvāra(=amatassa dvāra),不死之门(进入涅盘之门；S.12.27.﹑28﹑33﹑49﹑50)。S.45.7./V,8.︰“Yo kho, bhikkhu, rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo--idaṁ vuccati amataṁ. (比丘！凡是灭尽染?灭尽瞋?灭尽痴者，这被叫做‘无死’。)SA.8.5./I,275.︰Amatāti sādhubhāvena amatasadisā.Vuttampi hetaṁ--“saccaṁ have sādutaraṁ rasānan”ti nibbānāmatapaccayattā vā amatā.(无死：变成妥善，等於无死。即所说的这个：“真实最上诸味”，或‘涅盘无死’的缘性为‘无死’。) SA.43.12-33/III,112.︰Maraṇābhāvena amataṁ.(死亡的不存在，为‘无死’)。KhA.180.(on Sn.v.225.)︰Yasmā panassa na uppādo paññāyati, na vayo, na ṭhitassa aññathattaṁ tasmā taṁ na jāyati na jīyati na mīyatīti katvā amatanti vuccati.(因为生不出现，不灭，不住於变动；所以，不生、不老、不死，建立之后，被称为‘无死’。) DhA.vv.21-23./CS:pg.1.103.︰Amatapadanti amataṁ vuccati nibbānaṁ.(不死的路：「不死」被叫做「涅盘」。) S.12.50./II,80.︰“Yato kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako evaṁ lokassa samudayañca atthaṅgamañca yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako diṭṭhisampanno itipi, dassanasampanno itipi, āgato imaṁ saddhammaṁ itipi, passati imaṁ saddhammaṁ itipi, sekkhena ñāṇena samannāgato itipi sekkhāya vijjāya samannāgato itipi, dhammasotaṁ samāpanno itipi, ariyo nibbedhikapañño itipi, amatadvāraṁ āhacca tiṭṭhati itipī”ti.(诸比丘！圣弟子如是如实知此世间之集与灭。诸比丘！对此，圣弟子可谓具足(正)见(diṭṭhisampanno= maggadiṭṭhiyā道之见)、具足观(意义同前)、达到正法、见到正法、具足学智、具足学明、具足法流、(具足)圣抉择慧，立於无死之门。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [a + mata = mṛta pp. of mṛ, Vedic amṛta = Gr. a]--m(b)rot-o & a]mbrosi/a = Lat. im-mort-a(lis) 1. The drink of the gods, ambrosia, water of immortality, (cp. BSk. amṛta-varṣa “rain of Ambrosia” Jtm 221). -- 2. A general conception of a state of durability & non-change, a state of security i. e. where there is not any more rebirth or re-death. So Bdhgh at KhA 180 (on Sn.225) “na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati ti amatan ti vuccati”, or at DhA.I,228 “ajātattā na jiyyati na miyyati tasmā amatan ti vuccati”. -- Vin.I,7 = M.I,169 (apārutā tesaṁ amatassa dvārā); Vin.I,39; D.II,39, 217, 241; S.I,32 (= rāgadosamoha-khayo), 193; III,2 (°ena abhisitta “sprinkled with A.”); IV,94 (°assa dātā), 370; V,402 (°assa patti); A.I,45 sq.; III,451; IV,455; V,226 sq., 256 sq. (°assa dātā); J.I,4 (V.25); IV,378, 386; V,456 (°mahā-nibbāna); Sn.204, 225, 228 (= nibbāna KhA 185); Th.1, 310 (= agada antidote); It.46 = 62 (as dhātu), 80 (°assa dvāra); Dh.114, 374 (= amata-mahā-nibbāna DhA.IV,110); Miln.258 (°dhura savanûpaga), 319 (agado amataṁ & nibbānaṁ amataṁ), 336 (amatena lokaṁ abhisiñci Bhagavā), 346 (dhamm’âmataṁ); DA.I,217 (°nibbāna); DhA.I,87 (°ṁ pāyeti); Dāvs II.34; V,31; Sdhp.1, 209, 530, 571.

--ogadha diving into the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S.V,41, 54, 181, 220, 232; A.III,79, 304; IV,46 sq., 317, 387; V,105 sq.; Sn.635; Th.1, 179, 748; Dh.411 (= amataṁ nibbānaṁ ogahetvā DhA.IV,186); Vv 50²⁰. --osadha the medicine of Ambrosia, ambrosial medicine Miln.247. --gāmin going or leading to the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S.I,123; IV,370; V,8; A.III,329; Th.2, 222. --dasa one who sees Amata or Nibbāna Th.1, 336. --dundubhi the drum of the Immortal (Nibbāna) M.I,171 = Vin.I,8 (has °dudrabhi). --dvāra the door to Nibbāna M.I,353; S.I, 137 = Vin.I,5; S.II,43, 45, 58, 80; A.V,346. --dhātu the element of Ambrosia or Nibbāna A.III,356. --patta having attained to Ambrosia A.IV,455. --pada the region or place of Ambrosia S.I,212 (“Bourne Ambrosial” trsl^n. p. 274); II,280; Dh.21 (= amatassa adhigama-vupāyo vuttaṁ hoti DhA.I,228). --phala ambrosial fruit S.I,173 = Sn.80. --magga the path to Ambrosia DhA.I,94. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2,【形】诸天的食物，甘露(The drink of the gods, ambrosia, water of immortality)。cp. BSk. amrta-varsa “rain of Ambrosia(甘露雨)” Jtm 221.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】神的食物，特别美味的食物，不死境。 ~ndada, 【形】带来不死境。 ~pada, 【中】达到不死。 ~magga, 【阳】导致不死之道。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amatabbāka: {'def': '(?) at VvA.111, Acc. to Hardy (Index) “a precious stone of dark blue colour”. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amatta: {'def': '【形】不陶醉的。【中】小的土制容器。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不陶醉的。【中】小的土制容器。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amattaññu: {'def': '(adj.) [a + matta + °ñu = Sk. amātrajña] not knowing any bounds (in the taking of food), intemperate, immoderate It.23 (bhojanamhi); Dh.7 (id.); Pug.21. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amattaññutā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to prec.] immoderation (in food) D.III,213; It.23 (bhojane); Pug.21; Dhs.1346 (bhojane); DhsA.402. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(amattaññu不知适量+tā状态),【阴】不知适量的状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amattaññū: {'def': '【形】不知适量的，过度的。amattaññutā,【阴】无节制。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无节制的，过度的。 amattaññutā, 【阴】无节制。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amatteyya: {'def': '【形】不尊敬母亲。 ~tā , 【阴】对母亲的不敬。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不孝敬母亲。amattayyatā,【阴】对母亲的不孝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amatteyyatā: {'def': '(f.) [from matteyyatā] irreverence towards one’s mother D.III,70, 71. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amatā: {'def': '【阴】余甘子(东印度的一种乔木 (Phyllantus emblica) 与其它的诃子一起用於鞣革)为灌木，高1-3米。细短枝条上互生线状椭圆形小叶，宛如羽状复叶。花簇生叶腋；花后结蒴果，外果皮肉质可食。它是「三果粉」(Triphala churna)的三种成份之一。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】余甘子（东印度的一种乔木 (Phyllantus emblica) 与其它的诃子一起用于鞣革）(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amaṅkubhūta: {'def': '( a未+maṅkubhūta变成不安【过分】),【过分】未变成不安。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amba: {'def': '【阳】芒果树(一种原产印度的常绿乔木 (Mangifer indica)，叶革质，互生，花小，黄色或淡红色，成顶生的圆锥花序，产芒果和劣质淡灰色木材)。【中】芒果(台语：檨子suainn a2)。ambaṅkura,【阳】芒果芽。ambapakka,【中】熟芒果。ambapāna, 芒果糖浆。ambapiṇḍī,【阴】一串芒果。ambavana,【中】ambasaṇḍa,【阳】芒果园。ambalaṭṭhikā,【阴】芒果幼苗园。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Derivation unknown. Not found in pre-Buddhist literature. The Sk. is āmra. Probably non-Aryan], the Mango tree, Mangifera Indica D.I,46, 53, 235; J.II,105, 160; Vv 79¹⁰; Pug.45; Miln.46; PvA.153, 187.

--aṭṭhi the kernel or stone of the m. fruit DhA.III,207, 208. --ārāma a garden of mangoes, mango grove Vv 79⁵; VvA.305. --kañjika mango gruel Vv 33³⁷ (= ambilakañjika VvA.147). --pakka a (ripe) mango fruit J.II,104, 394; DhA.III,207. --panta a border of mango trees VvA.198. --pānaka a drink made from mangoes DhA.III,207. --piṇḍi a bunch of mangoes J.III,53; DhA.III,207. --pesikā the peel, rind, of the m. fruit Vin.II,109. --potaka a mango sprout DhA.III,206 sq. --phala a m. fruit PvA.273, 274. --rukkha a m. tree DhA.III,207; VvA.198. --vana a m. grove or wood D.II,126; J.I,139; VvA.305. --siñcaka one who waters the mangoes, a tender or keeper of mangoes Vv 79⁷. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】芒果树（一种原产印度的常绿乔木 (Mangifer indica)，叶革质，互生，花小，黄色或淡红色,成顶生的圆锥花序，产芒果和劣质淡灰色木材）。【中】芒果。 ~aṅkura, 【阳】芒果芽。 ~pakka,【中】熟芒果。 ~pāna,芒果糖浆。 ~piṇḍī, 【阴】一束芒果。 ~vana, 【中】 ~saṇḍa, 【阳】芒果园。 ~laṭṭhikā, 【阴】芒果幼苗园。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ambagāma: {'def': '(amba芒果树+gāma村),【阳】芒果树村(地名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ambaka: {'def': '¹ (adj.) [= ambakā?] “womanish” (?), inferior, silly, stupid, of narrow intellect. Occurs only with reference to a woman, in comb^n. with bālā A.III,349 (v. l. amma°) = V,139 (where spelt ambhaka with v. l. appaka° and gloss andhaka); V,150 (spelt ambhaka perhaps in diff. meaning).

--maddarī see next. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [demin. of amba] a little mango, only in °maddarī a kiṇd of bird [etym. uncertain] A.I,188. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ambakā: {'def': '【阴】妇人(他译：芒果女)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. ambikā demin. of ambī mother, wife, see P. amma & cp. also Sk. ambālikā f.] mother, good wife, used as a general endearing term for a woman Vin.I,232 = D.II,97 (here in play of words with Ambapālī expl^d. by Bdhgh at Vin.I,385 as ambakā ti itthiyikā). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ambala: {'def': 'at J.II,246 (°koṭṭhaka-āsana-sālā) for ambara¹ (?) or for ambaka² (?), or should we read kambala°?. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ambalaṭṭhikā: {'def': '【阴】芒果树苖圃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ambapālivana: {'def': '(Ambapālī庵婆波利+vana1林),【中】庵婆波利林(地名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ambapālī: {'def': 'f. アンバパーリー(Ambapālī的片假名發音), 蓭婆波利 [遊女, 比丘尼].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'f. アンバパーリー, 蓭婆波利 [遊女, 比丘尼].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阴】庵婆波利(人名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ambara: {'def': '【中】1.布料。2.天空。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Vedic ambara circumference, horizon] the sky, Dāvs.I,38; IV,51; V,32. -- Note. At J.V,390 we have to read muraja-ālambara, and not mura-jāla-ambara. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 布料。 2. 天空。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (m.-nt.) [etym. = ambara¹ (?) or more likely a distortion of kambala; for the latter speaks the comb^n. rattambara = ratta-kambala. -- The word would thus be due to an erroneous syllable division rattak-ambala (= ambara) instead of ratta-kambala] some sort of cloth and an (upper) garment made of it (cp. kambala) Vv 53⁷ (ratt° = uttariya VvA.236). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ambavana: {'def': '(amba芒果树+vana1林),【中】芒果树林。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ambha: {'def': '& Ambho (nt.) [see ambu] water, sea Dāvs.IV,54. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ambhaka: {'def': 'see ambaka. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ambho: {'def': '(‹haṁ喂！+bho尊！),【叹】喂！尊！', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [fr. haṁ + bho, see bho, orig. “hallo you there”] part. of exclamation, employed: 1. to draw attention = look here, hey! hallo! Vin.III,73 (= ālapan’âdhivacana); J.II,3; PvA.62. -- 2. to mark reproach & anger = you silly, you rascal D.I,194; It.114; J.I,174 (v. l. amho), 254; Miln.48. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】哈罗！嗨！（叫人注意的呼词）。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】嘿！(叫人注意的呼词)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ambila: {'def': '(Sk. amla),【形】酸的(sour, acid；one of the 6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura (see under rasa))。【阳】酸味，酸。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. amla = Lat. amarus] sour, acid; one of the 6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura (see under rasa): thus at Miln.56. Another enumeration at Nd² 540 & Dhs.629. -- J.I,242 (°anambila), 505 (loṇ°); II,394 (loṇ°); DA.I,270 (°yāgu sour gruel); DhA.II,85 (ati-ambila, with accuṇha & atisīta). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】变酸。【阳】酸味，酸。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ambu: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic ambu & ambhas = Gr. o)/mbros, Lat. imber rain; cp. also Sk. abhra rain-cloud & Gr. a)frόs scum: see P. abbha] water J.V,6; Nd¹ 202 (a. vuccati udakaṁ); Dāvs II.16. -- Cp. ambha.

--cārin “living in the water”, a fish Sn.62 (= maccha Nd² 91). --sevāla a water-plant Th.1, 113. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】水。~cārī,【阳】鱼。 ~ja,【形】水生动物。【中】睡莲。【阳】鱼。~da, ~dhara,【阳】云。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】水。ambucārin,【阳】鱼(“living in the water”, a fish)。ambuja(ambu + ja of jan),【形】【阳】【中】水生动物。【中】睡莲(a lotus Sn.845 (= paduma Nd1 202))。【阳】鱼。ambuda, ambudhara,【阳】云。ambusevāla,【阴】水生植物(a water-plant)。Cp. ambha.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ambuda: {'def': '[ambu + da fr. dā] “water-giver”, a cloud Dāvs.V,32; Sdhp.270, 275. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ambuja: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [ambu + ja of jan] “water-born”, i. e. 1. (m.) a fish S.I,52. -- 2. (nt.) a lotus Sn.845 (= paduma Nd¹ 202); Dāvs.V,46; Sdhp.360. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ambujinī: {'def': '【阴】莲花池塘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】莲花池塘。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ambā: {'def': '【阴】母亲。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】母亲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ambāṭaka: {'def': '(the hog-plum or ambarella, Spondias Mangifera), 猪李( Vin.II,17 (ambāṭakavana); DA.I,271 (ambāṭakarukkha))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'the hog-plum, Spondias Mangifera (a kind of mango) Vin.II,17 (°vana); DA.I,271 (°rukkha). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amha: {'def': 'amhā, (Amhi的【复】), 我们是。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(个人的【代】). 我，我们。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Amhi see atthi. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '& Amhan (nt.) [Sk. aśman, see also asama²] a stone Sn.443 (Instr. amhanā, but SnA 392 reads asmanā = pāsāṇena).

--maya made of stone, hard Dh.161 (= pāsāṇa° DhA.III,151). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(个人的【代】) 我，我们。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amhi: {'def': '’mhi, -omhi, (as 的【1.单】是), 我是。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(as 的【壹，单】是), 我是。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amho: {'def': ' = ambho J.I,174 (v. l.). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amhā: {'def': '【阴】牛(a cow (?))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [etym. uncertain; Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 201 too vague] a cow (?) A.I,229. The C. says nothing. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amhākaṁ: {'def': 'Amhe see ahaṁ. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '我们【复.业.与.属】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amilāta: {'def': '【形】非凋败了的，不枯萎的，不干瘪的。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】非凋败了的，不枯萎的，不乾瘪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amilātatā: {'def': '(f.) [a + milāta + tā] the condition of not being withered J.V,156. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amilātā: {'def': '【阴】药草，芦荟(一种主要产於的非洲〔芦荟属植物〕(Aloe vulgaris)，有肉质多浆的莲座丛，通常叶的边缘带刺并有黄、桔黄或红色管形花的长茎)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】药草，芦荟（一种主要产于的非洲〔芦荟属植物〕(Aloe vulgaris)，有肉质多浆的莲座丛，通常叶的边缘带刺并有黄、桔黄或红色管形花的长茎）。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amissa: {'def': '【形】未混杂他物的。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】未混杂他物的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amita: {'def': '【形】无穷的，无量的。amitābha,【形】无量的光。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无穷的，无量的。 amitābha, 【形】无穷的光彩。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amitta: {'def': '[Vedic amitra; a + mitta] one who is not friend, an enemy D.III,185; It.83; Sn.561 (= paccatthika SnA 455); Dh.66, 207; J.VI,274 (°tāpana harassing the enemies). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a非+mitta友),【阳】非友、敌人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】敌人。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amitābha: {'def': '(adj.) [a + mita (pp. of mā) + ā + bhā] of boundless or immeasurable splendour Sdhp.255. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amma: {'def': '(indecl.) [Voc. of ammā] endearing term, used (1) by children in addressing their mother = mammy, mother dear D.I,93; J.II,133; IV,1, 281 (amma tāta uṭṭhetha daddy, mammy, get up!); DhA.II,87; PvA.73, 74. ‹-› (2) in general when addressing a woman familiarly = good woman, my (good) lady, dear, thus to a woman J.I,292; PvA.63; DhA.II,44; to a girl PvA.6; to a daughter DhA.II,48; III,172. -- Cp. ambakā. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ammaṇa: {'def': '【中】量谷粒的标准，大约有五蒲式耳（一蒲式耳容量等于八加仑）。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】量谷粒的标准，大约有五蒲式耳(一蒲式耳容量等於八加仑)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [of uncertain etym.; Sk. armaṇa is Sanskritised Pāli. See on form & meaning Childers s. v. and Kern, Toev. p. 72] 1. a trough J.V,297; VI,381 (bhatt°). ‹-› 2. a certain measure of capacity J.I,62; II,436 (taṇḍul°). ‹-› As °ka at J.II,117 (v. l. ampaṇaka); DA.I,84. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ammā: {'def': '(f.) [onomat. from child language; Sk. ambā, cp. Gr. a)mmaζ mother, Oisl. amma “granny”, Ohg. amma “mammy”, nurse; also Lat. amita father’s sister & amāre to love] mother J.III,392 (Gen. ammāya). -- Voc. amma (see sep.). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(onomat. from child language; Sk. ambā),【阴】母亲，老妈，奶奶。(呼格的‘amma ’时常用来向称呼女孩或女儿)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】母亲。（呼格的 amma 时常用来向称呼女孩或女儿）。(p39)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amogha: {'def': '【形】非空的，非无用的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】非空的，非无用的。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amoha: {'def': '(adj.) [a + moha, cp. Sk. amogha] not dull. As n. absence of stupidity or delusion D.III,214; Pug.25. ‹-› The form amogha occurs at J.VI,26 in the meaning of “efficacious, auspicious” (said of ratyā nights). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】智慧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】智慧。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amu: {'def': '【代】某某。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【代】某某，那ㄋㄚˋ【阳.单.主】。【阳】：单.主.asu﹑amu；复.主.amū﹑amuyo；单.宾.amuṁ；复.宾.amū﹑amuyo；单.具.amunā；复.具.amūhi﹑amūbhi；单.离.amusmā﹑amusmhā；复.离.amūhi﹑amūbhi；单.与.﹑属.Amussa﹑adussa；复.与.﹑属.amūsaṁ﹑amūsānaṁ；单.处.amusmiṁ﹑amumhi；复.处.amūsu。【阴】：单.主.asu；复.主.amū﹑amuyo；单.宾.amuṁ；复.宾.amū﹑amuyo；单.具.﹑离.amuyā；复.具.﹑离.amūhi﹑amūbhi；单.与.﹑属.amuyā；复.与.﹑属.amūsaṁ﹑amūsānaṁ；单.处.amuyaṁ﹑amūssaṁ；复.处.amūsu。【中】：单.主.aduṁ﹑amuṁ；复.主.amūni﹑amū；单.宾.aduṁ﹑amuṁ；复.宾.amūni﹑amū。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amucchita: {'def': '(adj.) [a + mucchita] not infatuated (lit. not stupified or bewildered), not greedy; only in phrase agathita amucchita anajjhāpanna (or anajjhopanna) D.III,46; M.I,369; S.II,194. See ajjhopanna. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不昏头昏脑的，不入迷的，不贪婪的。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不昏头昏脑的，不入迷的，不贪婪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amuka: {'def': '(amu那【阳.单.主】+ka (形容词化)),【形】那ㄋㄚˋ【阳.单.主】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amusmiṁ: {'def': '(‹asu那), 那ㄋㄚˋ【阳.中.单.处】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amutra: {'def': '(adv.) [pron. base amu + tra] in that place, there; in another state of existence D.I,4, 14, 184; It.99. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】某个地方。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】某个地方，在那ㄋㄚˋ里。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amutta: {'def': '(adj.) [a + mutta] not released, not free from (c. Abl.) It.93 (mārabandhanā). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】未释放的，无自由的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】未释放的，无自由的。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amu°: {'def': 'base of demonstr. pron. “that”, see asu. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amuṁ: {'def': '【阳】【阴】那ㄋㄚˋ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amājāta: {'def': '(adj.) [amā + jāta; amā adv. “at home”, Vedic amā, see under amacca] born in the house, of a slave J.I,226 (dāsa, so read for āmajāta, an old mistake, expl^d. by C. forcibly as “āma ahaṁ vo dāsī ti”!). See also āmāya. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amāmaka: {'def': '参考 Amama。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + mama + ka, cp. amama] “not of me” i. e. not belonging to my party, not siding with me DhA.I,66. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '不自私的，无渴望的。参考 Amama。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amānusa: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic amānuṣa, usually of demons, but also of gods; a + mānusa, cp. amanussa] non- or superhuman, unhuman, demonic, peculiar to a non-human (Peta or Yakkha) Pv.II,12²⁰ (kāma); IV,1⁵⁷ (as n.); IV,3⁶ (gandha, of Petas). -- f. °ī Dh.373 (rati = dibbā rati DhA.IV,110); Pv III,7⁹ (ratti, love). (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'amānusika,【形】非人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'amānusika, 【形】非人。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amātika: {'def': '(adj.) [a + mātika from mātā] without a mother, motherless J.V,251. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amātāpitika: {'def': '【形】无父母的，孤儿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无父母的，孤儿。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amāvasin: {'def': '【阴】新月第一天(农历初一或十六日)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amāvasī: {'def': '【阴】新月日（农历初一或十六日）。(p38)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Amāya: {'def': '(adj.) [a + māyā] not deceiving, open, honest Sn.941 (see Nd¹ 422: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā). Cp. next. (Page 73)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a+māya),【形】无诳的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amāyāvin: {'def': '(adj.) [a + māyāvin, cp. amāya] without guile, not deceiving, honest D.III,47 (asaṭha +), 55 (id.), 237; DhA.I,69 (asaṭhena a.). (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Amāyāvī: {'def': '(a+māya),【形】无诳的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amūsaṁ: {'def': '【阳】【中】那ㄋㄚˋ些。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Amūḷh: {'def': 'a-vinaya “acquittal on the ground of restored sanity” (Childers) Vin.I,325 (IX.6, 2); II,81 (IV.5), 99 (IV.14, 27); IV,207, 351; M.II,248. (Page 74)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

An-: {'def': 'form of the neg. prefix a-before vowels. For negatives beginning with an° see the positive. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(位置在母音为首的字之前), 字首 1.无。2.不。3.非。4.未(an不+【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ana-: {'def': 'negative prefix, contained in anappameyya, (Th.1, 1089), anamatagga & anabhava. See Vinaya Texts II,113. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '不(negative prefix)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anabbhita: {'def': '(adj.) [an + abbhita] not restored, not to be restored Vin.IV,242; Pv.I,12³ (where reading prob. faulty & due to a gloss; the id. p. at Th.2, 129 has ayācita & at J.III,165 anavhāta; PvA.64 expl^s. by anavhāta, v. l. anabbhita). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anabhijjhita: {'def': '(adj.) [an + abhijjhita] not desired Sn.40 (cp. Nd² 38); Vv 47⁴ (= na abhikaṅkhita VvA.201). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anabhijjhā: {'def': '(f.) [an + abhijjhā] absence of covetousness or desire D.III,229, 269; Dhs.32, 35, 277. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anabhijjhālū: {'def': '(adj.) [an + abhijjhālū] not greedy or covetous D.III,82; Pug.40. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anabhinandati: {'def': '(an不+abhinandati全面欢喜), 不全面欢喜。【过分】anabhinandita 未全面欢喜。【独】anabhinanditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'etc. see abhi° etc. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anabhiraddha: {'def': '(adj.) [an + abhiraddha] in anger Vin.IV,236. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anabhiraddhi: {'def': '(f.) [an + abhiraddhi] anger, wrath D.I,3 (= kopass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ DA.I,52). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anabhirata: {'def': '【形】不乐於。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [an + abhirata] not taking delight in J.I,61 (naccâdisu). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不乐于。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anabhirati: {'def': '【阴】不满，不平，忧郁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】不满，不平，忧郁。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [an + abhirati] not delighting in, dissatisfaction, discontent D.I,17 (+ paritassanā); III,289; J.III, 395; DA.I,111. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anabhisambhuṇamāna: {'def': '(adj.) [ppr. med. of an + abhisambhuṇāti] not obtaining, unable to get or keep up D.I,101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA.I,268). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anabhuṇṇatatā: {'def': '(f.) [an + abbhuṇṇata + tā] the state of not being erect, i. e. hanging down J v.156. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anabhāva: {'def': '(anu + abhāva),【阳】完全停止。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ana + bhāva] the utter cessation of becoming. In the oldest Pali only in adj. form anabhāvaṁ kata or gata. This again found only in a string of four adjectives together expressing the most utter destruction. They are used at Vin.III,3 of bad qualities, at S.II,63 of certain wrong opinions, at M.I,487; S.IV,62 = v.527 of the khandas, at M.I,331 of the Mental Intoxications (Āsavas), at A.IV,73 of certain tastes, of a bad kamma A.I,135, of evil passions A.I,137, 184, 218; II,214 of pride A.II,41, of craving A.II,249, of the bonds A.IV,8. In the supplement to the Dīgha (D.III,326) and in the Iti-vuttaka (p. 115) a later idiom, anabhāvaṁ gameti, cause to perish, is used of evil thoughts. Bdhgh (quoted Vin.III,267) reports as v. l. anubhāva. Cp. Nd I,90; and Nd² under pahīna. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ana不+bhāva变成),【阳】不变成。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anacchariya: {'def': '(an非+acchariya不可思议),【形】非不可思议。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anadhivara: {'def': '【阳】优胜者(=visiṭṭha)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】世尊。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anajjhiṭṭha: {'def': '【形】未受请求的，不被邀请。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】未受请求的，不被邀请。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [an + ajjhiṭṭha] uncalled, unbidden, unasked Vin.I,113; Pv.I,12³ (T. anabbhita, v. l. anijjhiṭṭha; J.III,165 has anavhāta; Th.2, 129 ayācita; PvA.64 expl^s. by anavhāta). Anaṭi [An, Vedic aniti & anati] to breathe KhA.I,124 (in def. of bāla); DA.I,244 (read ananti for aṇanti). Cp. pāṇa. (Page 30)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anakkhāta: {'def': '﹐【阳】，未被宣布者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anala: {'def': '【阳】火。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】火。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [an + ala] 1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable M.I,455; J.II,326 = IV. 471. -- 2. dissatisfied, insatiate J v.63 (= atitta C.). ‹-› 3. °ṁ kata dissatisfied, satiated, S.I,15 (kāmesu). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Analasa: {'def': '(an不+alasa懒惰),【形】不懒惰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Analaṅkata: {'def': '【形】 1. 不满。2. 不装饰。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】1.不满。2.不装饰。kāmesu analaṅkatā, 贪得无厌(S.1.28./I,15.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anamatagga: {'def': '【形】无始的(开始是未知的)。无始，台语：无起头bo5 khi2 thau5，无寑头bo5 chim2 thau5。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [ana (= a neg.) + mata (fr. man) + aggā (pl.). So Dhammapāla (avidit-agga ThA.289); Nāṇakitti in Ṭīkā on DhsA.11; Trenckner, Notes 64; Oldenberg, Vin. Texts II,114. Childers takes it as an + amata + agga, and Jacobi (Erzähl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. § 251) as a + namat (fr. nam) + agga. It is Sanskritized at Divy 197 by anavarāgra, doubtless by some mistake. Weber, Ind. Str. III,150 suggests an + āmrta, which does not suit the context at all]. Ep. of Saṁsāra “whose beginning and end are alike unthiṅkable”, i. e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the Canon: S.II,178, 187 sq. = III,149, 151 = v.226, 441 (quoted Kvu 29, called Anamatagga-pariyāya at DhA.II,268) and Th.2, 495, 6. Later references are Nd² 664; PvA.166; DhA.I,11; II,13, 32; Sdhp.505. [Cp. anāmata and amatagga, and cp. the English idiom “world without end”. The meaning can best be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from the examples quoted above from the Saṁyutta. According to the Yoga, on the contrary (see e. g., Woods, Yoga-system of Patañjali, 119), it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality of the Yogī, to understand the beginning and end of Saṁsāra]. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】开始是未知的。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anamha: {'def': '(adj.) [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 70 = ana-mha “unlaughing” with ana = an (cp. anabhāva & anamatagga) and mha from smi, cp. vimhayati = Sk. vismayati] being in consternation or distress, crying J.III, 223 (°kāle = ārodana-kāle C.). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anandha: {'def': '(an非+andha盲目),【形】非盲目。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ananta: {'def': '【形】永无止境的，无边的，无限的。pañcānantaryāṇi (梵pañcānantaryāṇi)﹐五无间地狱，即阿鼻地狱，为八大地狱中之最苦处。造作五无间业(pañca kammāni ānantarikāni)所感招的罪业。即：杀母(巴mātughātako paṭijānāti )、杀父(巴pitughātako；梵pitraghāta)、杀阿罗汉(巴arahantaghātako；梵arhataghāta)、破和合僧(巴saṅghabhedako；梵saṃghabheda)、出佛身血(巴ruhiruppādako﹐lohituppādako；梵 tathāgatasyāntike dusṭa-citta-rudhirotpādana)等五逆罪。此五种罪业能招感无间地狱之苦果，故又称五无间业。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】永无止境的，无限的，无限。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anantara: {'def': '【形】下一个，邻接的，随后的。anantaraŋ, 【副】在后边。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(an无+antara内部?中途),【形】1.无内部。2.无中途。3.下一个，邻接的，随后的。anantaraṁ,【副】在后边。antarābhava (antarā-bhava)(梵), 中阴身、中有(某些部派的观点，上座部不承认)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ananubodha: {'def': '(an未+anu随+bodha觉)﹐【阳】不随觉。ananubodhāti abujjhanena ajānanena(不随觉：不觉悟、不知)(A.4.1./II,1.；D.16./II,122~123.、《长阿含2经》 (T1.13 a))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(an无+anubodha随觉),【形】【阳】无随觉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ananucchavika: {'def': '【形】不合适的，不适合的。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不合适的，不适合的，不当的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ananucchaviya: {'def': '(an不+anu随+chaviya表皮、皮肤),【形】不随表皮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ananugiddha: {'def': '(na+anugiddha)不耽溺、不眷恋、不贪婪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ananulomika: {'def': '(an不+anulomika随适当的),【形】不适当的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ananussuta: {'def': '(an未+anu随+suta听[到]【过分】),【过分】未随听[到]。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anapekkha: {'def': '【形】没有期待。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】没有期待，不求。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(an不+apekkha顾及),【形】不顾及。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anappaka: {'def': '(an不+appaka少),【形】不少的，很多的，重要的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】很多，多数，重要的。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anapāya: {'def': '(an不+apāya离去),【形】不离去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anapāyin: {'def': '【形】不离去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anariya: {'def': '(adj.) [an + ariya, see also anāriya] not Aiyan, ignoble, low Vin.I,10; D.III,232 (°vohāra, 3 sets of 4; the same at Vin v.125); Sn.664, 782 (°dhamma); Pug.13. -- See ariya. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(an非+ariya圣),【形】非圣的，卑贱的，粗俗的。anariyapariyesanā﹐【阴】非圣寻求(「不知老病死，愁染法过患，希求深爱著…彼非圣寻求，诸佛所呵毁，是生死根本，智者当远离」(《本事经》,大正4.680a))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】卑贱的，粗俗的。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anasana: {'def': '【中】绝食(fasting)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】绝食。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [an + asana, cp. Sk. an-aśana] not eating, fasting, hunger D.III,75 & in same context at Sn.311 (= khudā SnA 324). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anasitvāna: {'def': '[ger. of an + aśati] without eating, fasting J.IV,371. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anassaka: {'def': '(adj.) either an-assaka or a-nassaka (q. v.). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anassana: {'def': '(nt.) [a + nassana, naś; cp. Sk. naśana] imperishableness, freedom from waste J.IV,168. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anassuṁ: {'def': '1^st sq, pret. of anusūyati (= Sk. anvaśruvaṁ) I have heard M.I,393. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anassāsika: {'def': '【形】没有(被)安慰的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [an + assāsa + ika; cp. Sk. āśvāsana & BSk. anāśvāsika Divy 207] not consoling, discouraging, not comforting M.I,514; S.II,191. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】没有（被）安慰的。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anassāvin: {'def': '(adj.) [an + assāvin; cp. assāva + āsava] not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Sn.853 (sātiyesu a. = sātavatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhasanthavavirahita SnA 549). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anasuropa: {'def': '[an + asuropa] absence of abruptness Dhs.1341. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anasuyyaṁ: {'def': '[Sk. anasūyan, ppr. of an + asūyati] not grumbling J.III,27 (v. l. for anusuyyaṁ T.). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anasūyaka: {'def': '(an+asūyaka,梵文同)【形】不发牢骚(not grumbling)，不嫉妒的、不羡慕的(not envious)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. anasūyaka, cp. usūya] not grumbling, not envious J.II,192. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anata: {'def': '(=anta)﹐【阳】1.终极。2.边界。【形】终极，末端，尽头，顶端。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anatta: {'def': '(an无+attan自我﹐梵an-atman),【形】无自我的。【阳】无自我、无我。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '无我。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '【形】无我的。【阳】无我。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anattamana: {'def': '(an不+attamana满意),【形】不满意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】得罪。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】得罪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anattan: {'def': '【形】【阳】，无我。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anattha: {'def': '【阳】 1. 伤害。 2. 不幸。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(an无+attha义利),【阳】【中】无义利。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anatthasaṁhita: {'def': '(an未+attha义利+saṁhita连结【过分】),【形】无利益的，未连结义利。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anattā: {'def': '无我', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Anatīta: {'def': '(an未+atīta过去﹑跨越【过分】),【过分】1.未过去。2.未跨越。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(an未+atīta过去), 【形】【阳】未来(=anāgata, the future)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anavajja: {'def': '(an无+avajja过失),【形】无过失。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anavajjatā: {'def': '(anavajja无过失+tā状态),【阴】无过失的状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anavakāsa: {'def': '(an无+avakāsa机会)﹐【阳】没机会，无空间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anavamānana: {'def': '(an+avamānana),【中】不轻视，尊敬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anavarata: {'def': '【形】持续的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】持续的。~taŋ, 【形】不变地，不断地。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anavarataṁ: {'def': '【形】不变地，不断地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anavasesa: {'def': '(an无+avasesa剩下),【形】没有任何剩余。anavasesaṁ,【副】完全，完全地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】没有任何剩余物，完成。 anavasesaŋ, 【副】完全，完全地。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anavaya: {'def': '【形】不缺乏的，完全的。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不缺乏的，完全的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [derivation doubtful. See Trenckner Pali Misc. 65] not lacking, complete in (Loc.), fulfilling D.I,88 (= anūna paripūra-kārin DA.I,248); A.III,152 (= samatta paripuṇṇa AA quoted by Tr. on Miln.10). (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anavaṭṭhita: {'def': '【形】未处理的，不稳固的。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】未处理的，不稳固的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anavhāya: {'def': '(an+avhāya‹ā-hū叫﹑邀请)﹐【阳】未受邀。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anavosita: {'def': '(adj.) [an + avosita; or ana + avosita = avusita?] unfulfilled, undone Th.1, 101. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anaya: {'def': '(a无+naya引导),【阳】无引导。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】不幸。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[a + naya] misfortune, distress Miln.277, usually comb^d. with vyasana (as also in BSk, e. g. Jtm 215) Vin.II,199; S.IV,159; A v.156; Miln.292; VvA.327; Sdhp.362. (Page 31)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anaṅgaṇa: {'def': '(an无+aṅgaṇa斑点),【形】无斑点的，无可责难的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不热情的，无可责难的。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anaṇa: {'def': '(an无+aṇa负债),【形】无负债。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】免于债务。(p13)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Andha: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic andha, Lat. andabata (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.), other etym. doubtful] 1. (lit.) blind, blinded, blindfolded J.I,216 (dhūm°); Pv IV.1⁴⁸; PvA.3. -- dark, dull, blinding M.III,151 (°andhaṁ adv. dulled); Sn.669 (Ep. of timisa, like Vedic andhaṁ tamaḥ); DhA.II,49 (°vana dark forest). -- 2. (fig.) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not seeing D.I,191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (°veṇi, reading & meaning uncertain); A.I,128; Th.2, 394 (= bāla ThA.258). See cpds. °karaṇa, °kāra, °bāla, °bhūta.

--ākula blinded, foolish Vv 84⁹ (= paññācakkhuno abhāvena VvA.337). --karaṇa blinding, making blind, causing bewilderment (fig.), confusing It.82 (+ acakkhukaraṇa); Miln.113 (pañha, + gambhīra). --kāra blindness (lit. & fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin.I,16; D.II,12; A.I,56; II,54; III,233; J.III,188; Th.1, 1034; Dh.146; Sn.763; Vv 21⁴ (= avijj° VvA.106); Pug.30; Dhs.617; DA.I,228; VvA.51, 53, 116, 161; PvA.6; Sdhp.14, 280. --tamo deep darkness (lit. & fig.) S.V,443; It.84 (v. l.; T. andhaṁ tamaṁ); J.VI,247. --bāla blinded by folly, foolish, dull of mind, silly J.I,246, 262; VI,337; DhA.II,43, 89; III,179; VvA.67; PvA.4, 264. --bhūta blinded (fig.), mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant S.IV,21; A.II,72; J.VI,139 (spelled °būta); Dh.59, 174 (= paññā-cakkhuno abhāvena DhA.III,175). --vesa “blind form”, disguise J.III,418. (Page 49)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】1. 盲的。 2. 愚蠢的。~karaṇa, 【形】使人眩目的，使人混淆的。 ~bāla, 【形】愚蠢的，非常愚蠢的。~bhūta,【形】心理上盲目，无知识的。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】1.盲的。2.愚蠢的。andhakaraṇa,【形】使人眩目的，使人混淆的。andhabāla,【形】愚蠢的，非常愚蠢的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Andhabhūta: {'def': '(andha盲目【形】+bhūta变成【过分】),【过分】变成盲目，无知识。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Andhaka: {'def': 'm. 案達羅派 [南印度・案達羅地方的大眾四派的總稱].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '【阳】盲蝇。【形】安达人，安达国的。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】盲蝇。【形】安达人，安达国的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. andha] “blind fly”, i. e. dark or yellow fly or gad-fly Sn.20 (= kāṇa-makkhikānaṁ adhivacanaṁ SnA 33). (Page 49)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'm. 案達羅派 [南インド・アンドラ地方の大衆四派の総称].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Andhakāra: {'def': '【阳】黑暗，困惑，迷乱，为难，慌张。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(andha盲目+kāra作…者【阳】),【阳】黑暗，困惑，迷乱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Andhantama: {'def': '【阳】【中】很暗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】很暗。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Andu: {'def': 'anduka, 【阳】桎梏，链。 ~ghara, 【中】监禁，监狱。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. andu, andū & anduka] a chain, fetter Vin.I,108 = III,249 (tiṇ°); D.I,245; J.I,21 (°ghara prisonhouse); DhA.IV,54 (°bandhana). (Page 49)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'anduka,【阳】脚镣，桎。andughara,【中】监禁，监狱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anedha: {'def': '(adj.) [an + edha] without fuel J.IV,26 (=anindhana). (Page 45)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】无燃料。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】无燃料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aneja: {'def': '(an无+ejā动),【形】无动，不动，无贪欲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】无贪欲。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aneka: {'def': '(an非+eka一),【形】许多，各种不同的。anekappakāra,【形】anekavidha,【形】种种的，各式各样的，多种形式的，有许多部分的，多方面的。anekasate anekasahasse﹐数百数千。anekaṁsaggāha﹐蓄含种种紧握。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [an + ejā] free from desires or lust D.II,157; Sn.920, 1043, 1101, 1112; It.91 (opp. ejânuga Nd¹ 353 = Nd² 55; Dh.414 (= taṇhāya abhāvena DhA.IV,194), 422; Pv IV.1³⁵ (nittaṇha PvA.230). (Page 45)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】多数，各种不同的。 ~ppakāra, 【形】 ~vidha, 【形】种种的，各式各样的，多种形式的，有许多部分的，多方面的。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) (usually °-) [an + eka] not one, i. e. many, various; countlcss, numberless It.99 (saṁvaṭṭakappā countless aeons); Sn.688 (°sākhā); Dh.153 (°jātisāra); J.IV,2; VI,366.

--pariyāyena (Instr.) in many ways Vin.I,16; Sn.p. 15. --rūpa various, manifold Sn.1049, 1079, 1082; Nd² 54 (= anekavidha). --vidha manifold Nd² 54; DA.I,103. --vihita various, manifold D.I,12, 13, 178; It.98; Pug.55; DA.I,103 (= anekavidha). (Page 45)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anekavihita: {'def': '(aneka许多+vihita准备【过分】),【形】许多已被准备。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anekaṁsikatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. anekaṁsa + kata] uncertainty, doubtfulness Miln.93. (Page 45)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anekaṁsā: {'def': '(f.) [an + ekaṁsā] doubt Nd² 1. (Page 45)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anelagala: {'def': 'Aneḷagala, Aneḷagaḷa,【无】无瑕疵的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anesanā: {'def': '【阴】错误的谋生方式。《法集论根本注》(CS:pg.97)： Ekavīsati anesanā ((比丘)二十一种错误的谋生方式(Ekavīsati anesanā))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [an + esanā] impropriety S.II,194; J.II,86; IV,381; Miln.343, 401; DA.I,169; DhA.IV,34; Sdhp.392, 427. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】错误的谋生方式。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aneḷa: {'def': 'aneḷaka,【形】完美的，纯粹的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [an + eḷa = ena, see neḷa & cp. BSk. eḍa (mūka); Vedic anena] faultless, pure; only in foll. cpds.: °gala free from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus expl^d. at DA.I,282, viz. elagalana-virahita), but more likely in lit. meaning “having a pure or clear throat” or, of vācā speech: “clearly enunciated” (thus Mrs. Rh. D. at Kindred Sayings I.241) Vin.I,197 = D.I,114 = S.I,189; A.II,51, 97; III,114, 195. Cp. also M Vastu III, 322. -- °mūga same as prec. “having a clear throat”, i. e. not dumb, fig. clever, skilled D.III,265; Sn.70 (= alālāmukha SnA 124), cp. Nd² 259. (Page 45)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'aneḷaka, 【形】完美的，纯粹的。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aneḷagala: {'def': '【形】没滴唾液的。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aneḷaka: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. BSk. aneḍaka, e. g. Av. Ś. I.187, 243; M Vastu I.339; III,322] = aneḷa, pure, clear M.II,5; J.VI,529. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anha: {'def': '[Vedic ahan] see pubbanha, majjhanha, sāyanha. Cp. aha. (Page 50)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anibbisanta: {'def': '【现分】不发现。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【现分】不发现。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anibbisaṁ: {'def': '(a无+nibbisaṁ发现【现分】),【现分】无发现【阳.单.主】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[ppr. of nibbisati, q. v.] not finding Th.1, 78 = Dh.153 (= taṁ ñāṇaṁ avindanto DhA.III,128). (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anicca: {'def': '【形】无常的，不稳定的。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '无常', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '无常。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '【形】无常的，不稳定的，变动不居的，变迁的(日语：推移sui i)(impermanent, transience)。【中】无常的。SA.22.122./II,334.：abhāvākārena aniccato, paṭipīḷanākārena dukkhato, ābādhaṭṭhena rogato, antodosaṭṭhena gaṇḍato, tesaṁ tesaṁ gaṇḍānaṁ paccayabhāvena vā khaṇanaṭṭhena vā sallato dukkhaṭṭhena aghato, visabhāgamahābhūtasamuṭṭhāna-ābādhapaccayaṭṭhena ābādhato, asakaṭṭhena parato, palujjanaṭṭhena palokato sattasuññataṭṭhena suññato, attābhāvena anattato. Evamettha “aniccato palokato”ti dvīhi padehi aniccamanasikāro, “suññato anattato”ti dvīhi anattamanasikāro, sesehi dukkhamanasikāro vuttoti veditabbo. (由无常：以成为乌有；由苦：以成为压迫；由病：疾病之义；由痈：以身内腐败之义；由剌(=箭)：各种诸痈以因缘存在或以挖之义；由痛：以苦之义；由病：以四大种异常因素、病因缘之义；由外(=他)：以非自己的之义；由坏：以崩溃之义；由空：以众生空性之义；由无我：以非个性、非个体之义。如是在此，‘由无常、由坏’两句是从无常作意。‘由空、由无我’两句是从无我作意。其他所说的是从苦作意应可知。)佛陀的遗教(pacchimabuddhavacanaṁ)D.16./II,156.：“handa dāni, bhikkhave, āmantayāmi vo, vayadhammā saṅkhārā appamādena sampādethā”ti.(啊！现在，诸比丘！我告诉你们，诸行是衰灭法，当不放逸，使之完全。) DA.16./II,593.(=SA.6.15./I,223.)：Appamādena sampādethāti sati-avippavāsena sabbakiccāni sampādeyyātha.(成就不放逸︰与(正)念不分离，於一切(时地)应该完全被做到。) S.22.102./III,155.：“Aniccasaññā, bhikkhave, bhāvitā bahulīkatā sabbaṁ kāmarāgaṁ pariyādiyati, sabbaṁ rūparāgaṁ pariyādiyati, sabbaṁ bhavarāgaṁ pariyādiyati, sabbaṁ avijjaṁ pariyādiyati, sabbaṁ asmimānaṁ samūhanati”.(诸比丘！已修习无常想，多修习者，遍抓拿(pariyādiyati‹pari遍+ādiyati抓拿)一切‘欲染’(kāmarāga：对感官的染著)，遍抓拿一切‘色染’(rūparāga：色染，分别蓝色等色法的染著-- S-ṭ.(S.35.70.)CS:p.2.293)，遍抓拿一切‘有染’，遍抓拿一切无明，连根拔起一切我慢(samūhanati‹(saṁ一起+ūhanati2拉出)：连根拔起)) 《杂阿含270经》世尊告诸比丘：「无常想修习多修习，能断一切欲爱、色爱、无色爱、掉、慢、无明。」《增壹阿含38.1经》(T2.717.3)世尊说：「比丘！当修无常想时，而无欲心，彼以无欲心，便能分别法，思惟其义，无有愁、忧、苦、恼。彼以思惟法义，则无愚惑错误修行。若见有斗诤者，彼便作是念：此诸贤士不修无常想，不广布无常想，故致此斗讼耳。彼以斗诤不观其义，以不观其义，则有迷惑之心，彼以执此愚惑，而命终入三恶道--饿鬼、畜生、地狱中。是故，诸比丘！当修无常想，广布无常想，便无瞋恚、愚惑之想，亦能观法，亦观其义。若命终之后，生三善处，生天上、人中、涅盘之道。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aniccasaññā: {'def': '(anicca无常+saññā想),【阴】无常想。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aniccatā: {'def': '(anicca无常+tā状态),【阴】无常的状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anicchanta: {'def': 'anicchamāna, 【现分】不愿意。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'anicchamāna,【现分】不愿意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anicchā: {'def': '(f.) [an + icchā] dispassion S v.6; adj. °a without desires, not desiring Sn.707. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】不爱好，冷静。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(an + icchā) ,【阴】无欲、不爱好、冷静(dispassion, without desires, not desiring)。aniccha,【形】无欲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anicchāretvā: {'def': '(a不+nicchāretvā ( nicchāreti‘使…爆出’的【独】),【独】不使…爆出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anidassana: {'def': '(a无+nidassana示现),【形】无示现。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anigha: {'def': '【形】无恼乱的、无烦恼的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see nigha¹ and īgha. Anicca, see Nicca. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】无烦恼的。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aniketa: {'def': '(a无+niketa住所)﹐【中】住所，家。aniketa =ageha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aniketasārī: {'def': '(a无+niketa住所+sārī接著的)﹐【形】无栉比鳞次的住所。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anikhāta: {'def': '(adj.) [a + nikhāta, pp. of nikhanati] not dug into, not dug down, not deep J.VI,109 (°kūla; C. agambhīrā). (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anikkasāva: {'def': '(adj.) [a + nikkasāva, cp. nikasāva] not free from impurity, impure, stained Dh.9 = Th.1, 969 = J.II,198 = v.50; DhA.I,82 (= rāgâdīhi kasāvehi sakasāva). (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】未摆脱心中污秽的。(p14)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(a不+nikkasāva无浊秽【形】),【形】未摆脱浊秽的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anikkaḍḍhanā: {'def': '(f.) [a + nikkaḍḍhanā] not throwing out or expelling J.III,22. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anikkujjati: {'def': '(a不+nikkujjati倾覆), 不倾覆。【阳.单.主﹐现分】anikkujjanto。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anila: {'def': '【阳】风。anilapatha,【阳】天空。aniloddhuta,【形】被风摇动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[from an, cp. Sk. aniti to breathe, cp. Gr. a)/nemos wind; Lat. animus breath, soul, mind] wind J.IV,119 (°patha air, sky); Miln.181; VvA.237; Sdhp.594. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】风。 ~patha, 【阳】天空。 ~loddhuta, 【形】被风摇动。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Animisa: {'def': '【形】不眨眼的。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Ved. animeṣa, cp. nimisati] not winking, waking, watchful Dāvs v.26 (nayana). (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a+nimisa),【形】不眨眼的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Animitta: {'def': '(a无+nimitta相),【形】无相。animitta ceto-samādhi,无相心定(无想心定)。M.A.43./II,355.：Animittā cetovimutti nāma terasa dhammā--vipassanā, cattāro āruppā, cattāro maggā, cattāri ca phalānīti. Tattha vipassanā niccanimittaṁ sukhanimittaṁ attanimittaṁ ugghāṭetīti animittā nāma. Cattāro āruppā rūpanimittassa abhāvena animittā nāma. Maggaphalāni nimittakaraṇānaṁ kilesānaṁ abhāvena animittāni.(无相心解脱有四法：毘婆舍那、四无色、四道和四果。此处毘婆舍那是解开常相、乐相、我相，名为无相。四无色是没有色相，名为无相。道与果是没有污染的作相，名为无相。)animittaṁ cetosamādhiṁ﹐无相心三摩地(「阿难！当如来不作意一切相(sabbanimittanaṁ=rūpanimittādīnaṁ色相)之时，及灭绝任何感受(ekaccānaṁ vedanānaṁ=lokiyānaṁ vedanānaṁ诸世间的感受)而入於无相心三摩地(phalasamāpatti「果三摩钵地」，巴宙译：《大般涅盘经》误译作：「灭想定」)，阿难！此时如来(老化)之身，才完全舒服的(phāsutaro)。」(D.16.Mahāparinibbānasuttaṁ大般涅盘经﹐CS:p.2.86；Dīgha-aṭṭhakathā CS:p.2.138；Dīgha-ṭīkā CS:p.2.146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Animmita: {'def': '(a未+nimmita创造【过分】),【过分】未创造。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Animmātar: {'def': '(a无+nimmātar创造者),【阳】无创造者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anindi-: {'def': '[the comp^n. form of nindā] in °ḷocana (with) faultless eyes J.VI,265. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anindita: {'def': '【形】无可责难的，无可辱骂的。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + nindita] blameless, faultless J.IV,106 (°aṅgin of blameless body or limbs). (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(a未+nindita责难【过分】),【过分】无可责难。【形】无可责难的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anindiya: {'def': '【形】值得不轻视的。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】值得不轻视的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anipphala: {'def': '(a不+ni无+phala果报)﹐不会没有果报。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anipphannarūpa: {'def': '﹐不完成色(1.空界、2.身表、3.语表、4.色轻快性、5.色柔软性、6.色适业性﹐加两种表色、7.色积集、8.色相续、9.色老性、10.色无常性)，色法的一类，不可作为观禅的目标。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anirākata: {'def': '(adj.) [a + nirākata] see niraṅkaroti. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anirākatajjhāna: {'def': '【阳】不轻视禅那。MA.6./I,157.︰Anirākatajjhānoti bahi anīhaṭajjhāno, avināsitajjhāno vā, nīharaṇavināsatthañhi idaṁ nirākaraṇaṁ nāma. Thambhaṁ niraṁkatvā nivātavuttīti-ādīsu cassa payogo daṭṭhabbo.(不将禅那排除在外，或不消灭禅那；以排除和消灭为此轻视（之义）。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anisammakārī: {'def': '【形】不考虑地行动的，匆匆的。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不考虑地行动的，匆匆的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anissara: {'def': '(adj.) [an + issara] without a personal ereator Th.1, 713. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】没有影响力的。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】没有影响力的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anissita: {'def': '(a未+nissita向下依靠【过分】),【过分】未(向下)依靠。Ud.p.81.(8-4) ︰“Nissitassa calitaṁ, anissitassa calitaṁ natthi. Calite asati passaddhi, passaddhiyā sati nati na hoti. Natiyā asati āgatigati na hoti. āgatigatiyā asati cutūpapāto na hoti. Cutūpapāte asati nevidha na huraṁ na ubhayamantarena . Esevanto dukkhassā”ti.(有所依止(nissitassa；cling)，即有动摇(calitaṁ；waver)；无所依止(anissitassa)，即无动摇，无动摇则轻安(passaddhi；calm)，轻安则无喜(rati na hoti；no bending)，无喜则无往来(āgatigati na hoti；coming-and-going即轮回)；无往来，则无死生(cutāpapāto na hoti)，无死生，则无此世、他世(n’ev’idha na huraṁ；no““here” or “yonder”)；亦无两者之中(ubhayamantare；nor anything between the two)，这是苦尽。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anissukin: {'def': '(adj.) [an + issukin, see also an-ussukin] not hard, not greedy, generous D.III,47 (+ amaccharin; v. l. anussukin); SnA 569 (see under niṭṭhurin). (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anitthi: {'def': '(f.) [an + itthi] a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, a woman ceasing to be a woman, “nonwoman” J.II,126 (comp^d with anadī a river without water; interpreted by ucchiṭṭh-itthi). (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anivattana: {'def': '【中】非中止，未中断，无填塞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】非中止, 未中断, 无填塞。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anivesana: {'def': '(a无+nivesana依恋),【形】无依恋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aniyamita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of a + niyameti] indefinite (as tt. g.) VvA.231. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aniyamitapaccattaṁ: {'def': '不限定主格。i.e.︰yaṁ︰那(what)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aniyata: {'def': '【形】不确定的，未决定的。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不确定的，未决定的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [a + niyata] not settled, uncertain, doubtful Vin.I,112; II,287; D.III,217. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aniyyāna: {'def': '(a不+niyyāna出去),【形】不出去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Aniñjana: {'def': '【中】不动性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】不动性。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': ' (nt.) [an + iñjana] immobility, steadfastness Ps.I,15. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aniñjita: {'def': '【形】坚决的，没受到干扰的, 镇定的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [an + iñjita] immoveable, undisturbed, unshaken Th.1, 386. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】坚决的，没受到干扰的, 镇定的。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aniṭṭha: {'def': '【形】不可喜的。【反】可喜的(iṭṭha)，或极可喜的(ati-iṭṭha)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不愉快的，不合意的。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Aniṭṭhaṅgata: {'def': 'see niṭṭhā². (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Aniṭṭhita: {'def': 'see niṭṭhita. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】未完成的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】未完成的。(p15)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anna: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic anna, orig. pp. of adati to eat] “eating”, food, esp. boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz. odana, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maṁsa (rice, gruel, flour, fish, meat) Nd¹ 372 = 495. Anna is spelt aṇṇa in comb^ns apar’aṇṇa and pubb’aṇṇa. Under dhañña (Nd² 314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubb’aṇṇaṁ: sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kaṅgu, varaka, kudrūsaka) and boiled, prepared food (apa’aṇṇaṁ: sūpeyya curry). SnA 378 (on Sn.403) expl^s. anna by yāgubhattâdi. -- D.I,7; A.I,107, 132; II,70, 85, 203; Sn.82, 240, 403, 924; J.III,190; Pug.51; Sdhp.106, 214.

--āpa food & water Sdhp.100. --da giving food Sn.297. --pāna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Sn.485, 487; Pv.I,5², 8²; KhA 207, 209; PvA.7, 8, 30, 31, 43. (Page 49)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】食物，米饭。annada,【形】施食者。annapāna,【中】食物和饮料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】食物，米饭。 ~da, 【形】施食者。 ~pāna, 【中】食物和饮料。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Annabhāra: {'def': '﹐贫穷(担食物者)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Annapāna: {'def': '(anna饭+pāna饮料)﹐饭及饮料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Annaya: {'def': 'in dur° see anvaya. (Page 49)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ano: {'def': '- is a frequent form of comp^n. an-ava, see ava. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anodaka: {'def': '【形】无水的。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [an + udaka] without water, dry J.I,307; DhA.I,52; Sdhp.443. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(an无+udaka水),【形】无水的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anodarikatta: {'def': '(an不+odarikatta贪吃的状态),【中】不贪吃的状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anodhi: {'def': '(an无+odhi限制),【阳】无限制，无限定，无边界，不预设立场。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anodissaka: {'def': '(adj.) [an + odissa + ka] unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in cpd. °vasena universally, thoroughly (with ref. to mettā) J.I,81; II 146; VvA.97 (in general; opp. odissaka-vasena). See also Mrs. Rh. D. Psalms of the Brethren p. 5 n. 1. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】1.无限制的。2.一般的。3.没有个别暗示的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 1. 无限制的。 2. 一般的。 3. 没有个别暗示的。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anogha: {'def': 'in anogha-tiṇṇa see ogha. Anojaka = anojā Vv 35⁴ (= VvA.161, where classed with yodhikā bandhujīvakā). (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anojagghati: {'def': 'at D.I,91 is v. l. for anujagghati. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anojā: {'def': '(f.) [*Sk. anujā] a kind of shrub or tree with red flowers J.VI,536 (korandaka +); usually in cpd. anojapuppha the a. flower, used for wreaths etc. J.I,9 (°dāma, a garland of a flowers); VI,227 (id.); DhA.II,116 (°caṅgoṭaka). (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】有橙色花的植物。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】有橙色花的植物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anoka: {'def': '(nt.) [an + oka] houselessness, a houseless state, fig freedom from worldliness or attachment to life, singleness S.V,24 = A.V,232 = Dh.87 (okā anokaṁ āgamma). ‹-› adj. homeless, free from attachment S.I,176; Dh.87 (= anālaya DhA.II,162); Sn.966 (adj.; expl^d at Nd¹ 487 by abhisaṅkhāra-sahagatassa viññāṇassa okāsaṁ na karoti, & at SnA 573 by abhisaṅkhāra-viññān’ādīnaṁ anokāsabhūta).

sārin living in a houseless state, fig. being free from worldly attachment S.III,10 = Nd¹ 197; Sn.628 (= anālaya-cārin SnA 468); Ud.32; Dh.404 (v. l. anokka°); DhA.IV,174 (= anālaya-cārin); Miln.386. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 1. 无房子的。 2. 无执着的。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(an无+oka住处),【形】1.无住处的。2.无执著的。DhA.vv.87-89.CS:pg.1.381.：anokaṁ vuccati anālayo, ālayato nikkhamitvā anālayasaṅkhātaṁ nibbānaṁ paṭicca ārabbha taṁ patthayamāno bhāveyyāti attho.(无住处(无家)被叫做无附著；从附著已离去后，无附著为条件作为涅盘的缘，确立它自此以后应修习之义。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anokāsa: {'def': '【形】没有机会、空间或时间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】没有机会、空间或时间。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anokāsakata: {'def': '【阳】未得许可。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anoma: {'def': '【形】较高的，上级的。 ~dassī, 【阳】有至高的智慧的人。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) (only °-) [an + oma] not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in foll. cpds.

--guṇa supreme virtue DA.I,288. --dassika of superior beauty Vv 20⁷, VvA.103 (both as v. l.; T. anuma°); Vv 43⁷. --dassin one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) J.I,228. --nāma of perfect name S.I,33 (“by name the Peerless” Mrs. Rh. D.), 235; Sn.153, 177 (cp. SnA 200). --nikkama of perfect energy Vv 64²⁷ (= paripuṇṇa-viriyatāya a. VvA.284). --pañña of lofty or supreme wisdom (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn.343, 352 (= mahāpañña SnA 347); Th.2, 522 (= paripuṇṇa-pañña ThA.296), DhA.I,31. --vaṇṇa of excellent colour Sn.686 J.VI,202. --viriya of supreme exertion or energy Sn.353. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】较高的，完美的。anomadassī,【阳】有至高的智慧的人。anomanāma,【中】大名鼎鼎。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anomajjati: {'def': '[anu + ava + majjati, mṛj] to rub along over, to stroke, only in phrase gattāni pāṇinā a. to rub over one’s limbs with the hand M.I,80, 509; S.V,216. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anonamanta: {'def': '【形】不弯下的。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不弯下的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anonamati: {'def': '[an + onamati] not to bend, to be inflexible, in foll. expressions: anonamaka (nt.) not stooping DhA.II,136; auonamanto (ppr.) not bending D.II,17 = III, 143; anonami-daṇḍa (for anonamiya°) an inflexible stick Miln.238 (anoṇami° T, but anonami° vv. ll., see Miln.427). (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anopa: {'def': 'see anūpa. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anoramati: {'def': '[an + ava + ram] not to stop, to continue J.III,487; DhA.III,9 (ger. °itvā continually). (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anorapāra: {'def': '(adj.) [an + ora + pāra] having (a shore) neither on this side nor beyond Miln.319. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anosakkanā: {'def': '【阴】奋发。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】奋发。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anosita: {'def': '(adj.) [an + ava + sita, pp. of sā] not inhabited (by), not accessible (to) Sn.937 (= anajjhositaṁ Nd¹ 441; jarādīhi anajjhāvutthaṁ ṭhānaṁ SnA 566). (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anotatta: {'def': '【阳】喜马拉雅山的一个湖的名字（一些印度河流的水源）。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'm. 阿耨達, 無熱悩 [雪山の池].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. 阿耨達, 無熱惱 [雪山之池].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '(梵Anavatapta),【阳】阿耨(ㄋㄡˋ)达池，喜马拉雅山的一个湖的名字(《长阿含经》说，由阿耨达池流出四大河。T1.116.3)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anottappa: {'def': '(an无+ottappa愧；‹na无+ava+tapp折磨),【中】无愧。anottāpī,【形】不害怕罪恶的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [an + ottappa] recklessness, hardness D.III,212; It.34 (ahirika +); Pug.20; Dhs.365. Cp. anottāpin. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】卤莽。 anottāpī, 【形】不害怕罪恶的，卤莽的。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anottāpin: {'def': '& Anottappin (adj.) [fr. anottappa] not afraid of sin, bold, reckless, shameless D.III,252, 282 (pp; ahirika); Sn.133 (p; ahirika +); It.27, 115 (anatāpin anottappin, vv. ll. anottāpin); Pug.20, 24. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anovassa: {'def': '(nt.) [an + ovassa; cp. Sk. anavavarṣana] absence of rain, drought J.V,317 (v. l. BB for anvāvassa T.; q. v.). (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anovassaka: {'def': '(adj.) [an + ovassaka] sheltered from the rain, dry Vin.II,211; IV,272; J.I,172; II,50; III,73; DhA.II,263; ThA.188. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】避雨处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】避雨处。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Anovattata: {'def': 'nāga-rājan﹐阿耨达龙王，译为无热恼龙王，为八大龙王之一。长阿含第三十经世记经：「此阎浮提所有龙王尽有三患，唯阿耨达龙无有三患。云何为三？一者举阎浮提所有诸龙，皆被热风、热沙著身，烧其皮肉，及烧骨髓以为苦恼，唯阿耨达龙王无有此患。二者举阎浮提所有龙宫，恶风暴起，吹其宫内，失宝饰衣，龙身自现以为苦恼，唯阿耨达龙王无如是患。三者举阎浮提所有龙王，各在宫中相娱乐时，金翅大鸟入宫搏撮，或始生方便，欲取龙食，诸龙怖惧，常怀热恼，唯阿耨达龙无如此患。若金翅鸟生念欲住，即便命终，故名阿耨达。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anta: {'def': '(=Anata),【阳】1.终极。2.边界。【形】终极，末端，尽头，顶端。【中】肠。antakara,【形】结束。antakiriyā,【阴】终止，减轻。antagamana,【中】去到末端，根除。antaguṇa,【中】肠系膜。antapūra,【阳】肠。antavaṭṭi,【阴】肠的盘绕。anta-saññin﹐认为世界是有边际的想法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】末端，尽头，目标，顶端。【中】肠。 ~kara, 【形】结束。 ~kiriyā, 【阴】终止，减轻。 ~gamana, 【中】去到末端，根除。 ~guṇa, 【中】肠系膜。 ~vaṭṭi, 【阴】肠的卷。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ (nt.) [Vedic āntra, contr. fr. antara inner = Lat. interus, Gr. e)/ntera intestines] the lower intestine, bowels, mesentery It.89; J.I,66, 260 (°vaddhi-maṁsa etc.); Vism.258; DhA.I,80.

--gaṇṭhi twisting of the bowels, lit. “a knot in the intestines” Vin.I,275 (°ābādha). --guṇa [see guṇa² = gula¹] the intestinal tract, the bowels S.II,270; A.IV,132; Kh III, = Miln.26; Vism.42; KhA 57. --mukha the anus J.IV,402. --vaṭṭi = °guṇa Vism.258. (Page 47)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [Vedic antya] 1. having an end, belonging to the end; only in neg. ananta endless, infinite, boundless (opp. antavant); which may be taken as equal to anta¹ (corresp. with Sk. anta (adj.) or antya; also in doublet anañca, see ākās’ânañca and viññāṇ’ânañca); D.I,23, 34 = D.III,224, 262 sq.; Sn.468 (°pañña); Dh.179, 180 (°gocara having an unlimited range of mental vision, cp. DhA.III,197); J.I,178. -- 2. extreme, last, worst J.II,440 (C. hīna, lāmaka); see also anta¹ 4. -- Acc. as adv. in ekantaṁ extremely, very much, “utterly” Dh.228 etc. See eka. (Page 47)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic anta; Goth. andeis = Ohg. anti = E. end; cp. also Lat. antiae forehead (: E. antler), and the prep. anti opposite, antika near = Lat. ante; Gr. a)nti/ & a)/nta opposite; Goth., Ags. and; Ger. ant-; orig. the opposite (i. e. what stands against or faces the starting-point)]. 1. end, finish, goal S.IV,368 (of Nibbāna); Sn.467; J.II,159. antaṁ karoti to make an end (of) Sn.283, 512; Dh.275, cp. antakara, °kiriyā. -- Loc. ante at the end of, immediately after J.I,203 (vijay°). -- 2. limit, border, edge Vin.I,47; Dh.305 (van°); J.III,188. -- 3. side: see ekamantaṁ (on one side, aside). -- 4. opposite side, opposite, counterpart; pl. parts, contrasts, extremes; thus also used as “constituent, principle” (in tayo & cattāro antā; or does it belong to anta² 2. in this meaning? Cp. ekantaṁ extremely, under anta²): dve antā (two extremes) Vin.I,10; S.II,17; III,135. ubho antā (both sides) Vin.I,10; S.II,17; J.I,8; Nd¹ 109. eko, dutiyo anto (contrasts) Nd¹ 52. As tayo antā or principles(?), viz. sakkāya, s.-samudaya, s.-nirodha D.III,216, cp. A.III,401; as cattāro, viz. the 3 mentioned plus s.-nirodhagāmini-paṭipadā at S.III,157. Interpreted by Morris as “goal” (J P T S. 1894, 70). -- Often pleonastically, to be expl^d as a “pars pro toto” figure, like kammanta (q. v.) the end of the work, i. e. the whole work (cp. E. sea-side, country-side); vananta the border of the wood = the woods Dh.305; Pv.II,3¹⁰ (expl^d by vana PvA.86; same use in BSk., vanânta e. g. at Jtm VI,21; cp. also grāmânta Av. Ś. I.210); suttanta (q. v.), etc. Cp. ākāsanta J.VI,89 & the pleonastic use of patha. --ananta (n.) no end, infinitude; (adj.) endless, corresponds either to Sk. anta or antya, see anta².

--ânanta end & no end, or finite and endless, D.I,22; DA.I,115. --ânantika (holding views of, or talking about) finiteness and infinitude D.I,22 (see expl^n. at DA.I,115); S.III,214, 258 sq.; Ps.I,155. --kara putting an end to, (n.) a deliverer, saviour; usually in phrase dukkhass’a. (of the Buddha) M.I,48, 531; A.II,2; III,400 sq.; Th.1, 195; It.18; Sn.32, 337, 539; Pug.71. In other comb^n. A.II,163 (vijjāy’); Sn.1148 (pañhān’). -- --kiriyā putting an end to, ending, relief, extirpation; always used with ref. to dukkha S.IV,93; lt 89; Sn.454, 725; DhA.IV,45. --gata = antagū Nd² 436 (+ koṭigata). --gāhikā (f.), viz. diṭṭhi, is an attribute of micchādiṭṭhi, i. e. heretical doctrine. The meaning of anta in this comb^n. is not quite clear: either “holding (wrong) principles (goals, Morris)”, viz. the 3 as specified above 4 under tayo antā (thus Morris J P T S. 1884, 70), or “taking extreme sides, i. e. extremist”, or “wrong, opposite (= antya, see anta²)” (thus Kern, Toev. s. v.) Vin.I,172; D.III,45, 48 (an°); S.I,154; A.I,154; II,240; III,130; Ps.I,151 sq. --gū one who has gone to the end, one who has gone through or overcome (dukkha) A.IV,254, 258, 262; Sn.401 (= vaṭṭadukkhassa antagata); 539. --ruddhi at J.VI,8 is doubtful reading (antaruci?). --vaṭṭi rimmed circumference J.III,159. --saññin being conscious of an end (of the world) D.I,22, cp. DA.I,115. (Page 46)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antaguṇa: {'def': '(anta肠+guṇa串?种类),【中】肠间膜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antaka: {'def': '(anta终极+ka (名词, 表示矮小?轻蔑),【阳】终极者，死亡。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】死亡。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic antaka] being at the end, or making an end, Ep. of Death or Māra Vin.I,21; S.I,72; Th.2, 59 (expl^d by ThA.65 as lāmaka va Māra, thus taken = anta²); Dh.48 (= maraṇa-saṅkhāto antako DhA.II,366), 288 (= maraṇa DhA.III,434). (Page 47)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antakiriyā: {'def': '(anta终极+kiriyā作),【阴】作终极。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antalikkha: {'def': '(Vedic antariksa = antari-ksa(ksi)拥有, 处在空中或地上的),【中】大气(the atmosphere or air )(= vehāyasa-saññita a. PvA 14); KhA 166.\xa0\xa0antalikkhaga going through the air A I.215. -- antalikkhacara walking through the air.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic antarikṣa = antari-kṣa (kṣi), lit. situated in between sky and earth] the atmosphere or air D.II,15; A.III,239; IV,199; Sn.222, 688; Dh.127 = Miln.150 = PvA.104; Pv.I,3¹ (= vehāyasa-saññita a. PvA.14); KhA 166.

--ga going through the air A.I,215. --cara walking through the air Vin.I,21; D.I,17; S.I,111; J.V,267; DA.I,110. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antamaso: {'def': '【无】至少。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [orig. Abl. of antama, *Sk. antamaśah; cp. BSk. antaśah as same formation fr. anta, in same meaning (“even”) Av. Ś. I.314; Divy 161] even Vin.III,260; IV,123; D.I,168; M.III,127; A.V,195; J.II,129; DA.I,170; SnA 35; VvA.155. (Page 47)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹anta终极),【无】至少。【副】甚至。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antara: {'def': '【中】不同。【形】内部的，在中间的。 antare, 在中间。~kappa, 【阳】中劫。 ~ghara, 【中】内村，内房。 ~sāṭaka,【中】内衣。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】1.内部 2.中途。【形】1.内部的，2.在中间的。【副】在…之间。antare, 在中间。antarakappa,【阳】中劫。antaraghara,【中】内村，内房。antarasāṭaka,【中】内衣。etthantara, 【中】於其中间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic antara, cp. Gr. e]/ntera = Sk. antra (see anta³), Lat. interus fr. prep. inter. See also ante & anto]. Primary meanings are “inside” and “in between”; as adj. “inner”; in prep. use & in cpds. “inside, in between”. Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides of the inside relation, i. e. having a space between, different from; thus nt. antaraṁ difference.

I. (Adj.-n) 1. (a) inner, having or being inside It.83 (tayo antarā malā three inward stains); esp. as --° in cpds. āmis° with greed inside, greedy, selfish Vin.I,303; dos° with aṅger inside, i. e. angry Vin.II,249; D.III,237; M.I,123; PvA.78 (so read for des°). Abl. antarato from within It.83. (b) in between, distant; dvādasa yojan° antaraṁ ṭhānaṁ PvA.139 139. -- 2. In noun-function (nt.): (a). spatial: the inside (of) Vv 36¹ (pītantara a yellow cloak or inside garment = pītavaṇṇa uttariya VvA.116); Dāvs.I,10 (dīp’antara-vāsin living on the island); DhA.I,358 (kaṇṇa-chidd° the inside of the ear; VvA.50 (kacch° inner room or apartment). Therefore also “space in between”, break J.V,352 (= chidda C.), & obstacle, hindrance, i. g. what stands in between: see cpds. and antara-dhāyati (for antaraṁ dhāyati). -- (b). temporal: an interval of time, hence time in general, & also a specified time, i. e. occasion. As interval in Buddhantaraṁ the time between the death of one Buddha and the appearance of another, PvA.10, 14, 21, 47, 191 etc. As time: It.121 (etasmiṁ antare in that time or at this occasion); Pv.I,10¹¹ (dīghaṁ antaraṁ = dīghaṁ kālaṁ PvA.52); PvA.5 (etasmiṁ antare at this time, just then). As occasion: J.V,287; Pug.55 (eḷaka-m-antaraṁ occasion of getting rain). S.I,20, quoted DA.I,34, (mañ ca tañ ca kiṁ antaraṁ what is there between me and you?) C. expl^s. kiṁ kāraṇā. M^rs. Rh. D. in trslⁿ. p. 256 “of me it is and thee (this talk) -- now why is this”; J.VI,8 (assa antaraṁ na passiṁsu they did not see a diff. in him). -- 3. Phrases: antaraṁ karoti (a) to keep away from or at a distance (trs. and intrs.), to hold aloof, lit. “to make a space in between” M.III,14; J. IV.2 (°katvā leaving behind); Pug.A 231 (ummāraṁ a. katvā staying away from a threshold); also adverbially: dasa yojanāni a. katvā at a distance of 10 y. PvA.139. -- (b.) to remove, destroy J.VI,56 (v. l. BB. antarāyaṁ karoti).

II. In prep. use (°-) with Acc. (direction) or Loc. (rest): inside (of), in the midst of, between, during (cp. III, use of cases). (a.) w. Acc.: antaragharaṁ paviṭṭha gone into the house Miln.11. -- (b.) w. Loc.: antaraghare nisīdanti (inside the house) Vin.II,213; °dīpake in the centre of the island J.I,240; °dvāre in the door J.V,231; °magge on the road (cp. antarāmagge) PvA.109; °bhatte in phrase ekasmiṁ yeva a. during one meal J I 19 = DhA.I,249; °bhattasmiṁ id. DhA.IV,12; °vīthiyan in the middle of the road PvA.96. °satthīsu between the thighs Vin.II,161 (has antarā satthīnaṁ) = J.I,218.

III, Adverbial use of cases, Instr. antarena in between D.I,56; S.IV,59, 73; J.I,393; PvA.13 (kāl° in a little while, na kālantarena ib. 19). Often in comb^n. antarantarena (c. Gen.) right in between (lit. in between the space of) DhA.I,63, 358. -- Loc. antare in, inside of, in between (-° or c. Gen. KhA 81 (sutt° in the Sutta); DhA.III,416 (mama a.); PvA.56, 63 (rukkh°). Also as antarantare right inside, right in the middle of (c. Gen.) KhA 57; DhA.I,59 (vanasaṇḍassa a.). -- Abl. antarā (see also sep. article of antarā) in comb^n. antarantarā from time to time, occasionally; successively time after time Sn.p. 107; DhA.II,86; IV,191; PvA.272.

IV. anantara (adj.) having or leaving nothing in between i. e. immediately following, incessant, next, adjoining J.IV,139; Miln.382 (solid; DhA.I,397; PvA.63 (tadantaraṁ immediately hereafter), 92 (immed. preceding), 97 (next in caste). See also abbhantara.

--atīta gone past in the meantime J.II,243. --kappa an intermediary kappa (q. v.) D I 54. --kāraṇa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pug.A 231 --cakka “the intermediate round”, i. e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate points of the compass Miln.178. --cara one who goes in between or inside, i. e. a robber S.IV,173. --bāhira (adj.) inside & outside J.I,125. --bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara-raṭṭha) Vin.III,47 --raṭṭha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince J.V,135. --vāsa an interregnum Dpvs.V.80. --vāsaka “inner or intermediate garment”, one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz. the saṅghāṭī, uttarāsaṅga & a.) Vin.I,94, 289; II,272. Cf. next. --sāṭaka an inner or lower garment [cp. Sk. antarīya id.], under garment, i. e. the one between the outer one & the body VvA.166 (q. v.). (Page 47)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antara-: {'def': '﹐【字首】内，中间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antaradhāna: {'def': 'antaradhāyana, 【中】不见，消失。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'antaradhāyana(‹antaradhāyati消失),【中】不见，消失。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance A.I,58 (saddhammassa); II,147; III,176 sq.; Miln.133; Dhs.645, 738, 871. Cp. °dhāyana. (Page 47)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antaradhāpeti: {'def': '(Antaradhāyati的【使】), 令消失。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antaradhāyana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance DhA.IV,191. (v. l. °adhāna). (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antaradhāyati: {'def': '[antara + dhāyati] to disappear Sn.449 (°dhāyatha 3^rd sg. med.); Vv 81²⁸ (id.); J.I,119 = DhA.I,248; DhA.IV,191 (ppr. °dhāyamāna & aor. dhāyi) PvA.152, 217, (°dhāyi), 245; VvA.48. -- ppr. antarahita (q. v.). -- Caus. antaradhāpeti to cause to disappear, to destroy J.I,147; II,415; PvA.123. (Page 47)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(antara + dhe + a), 消失。 antaradhāyi, 【过】。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(antara内+ dhāyati), 消失(to disappear)。antaradhāyi,【过】。antarahita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antaraghara: {'def': '(antara内部+ghara家), 家内。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antarahita: {'def': '(antaradhāyati 的【过分】)。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(antaradhāyati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of antaradhāyati] 1. disappeared, gone, left D.I,222. M.I,487. Miln.18. PvA.245. -- 2 in phrase anantarahitāya bhūmiyā (loc) on the bare soil (lit. on the ground with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i. e. on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin.I,47; II,209; M.II,57. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antarakappa: {'def': '(antara中途+kappa劫), 中途劫、中劫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antarantarā: {'def': '【副】偶尔，有时候。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】偶尔，有时候。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antaravāsaka: {'def': '【阳】内衣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】内衣。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Antarayati: {'def': '[cp. denom. fr. antara] to go or step in between, ger. antaritvā (= antarayitvā) J.I,218. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. denom.‹antara),夹在中间走(to go or step in between)。ger. antaritvā (= antarayitvā)。Pāci.IV,176(CS:Pāci.pg.228)︰Antaragharaṁ nāma rathikā byūhaṁ siṅghāṭakaṁ gharaṁ.(住宅区︰有车道、群衆、十字路、住家。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antaraŋsa: {'def': '【阳】两肩之间的空间。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Antaraṁsa: {'def': '[B.Sk. antarâṁsa; antara + aṁsa] “in between the shoulders”, i. e. the chest J.V,173 = VI,171 (phrase lohitakkho vihat’antaraṁso). (Page 47)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】两肩之间的空间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antaraṭṭhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [antara + aṭṭhaka] only in phrases rattisu antaraṭṭhakāsu and antaraṭṭhake hima-pātasamaye (in which antara functions as prep. c. Loc., according to antara II. b.) i. e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between the eighths (i. e. the eighth day before & after the full moon: see aṭṭhaka²). First phrase at Vin.I,31, 288; III 31; second at M.I,79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta-raṭṭhaka); A.I,136 (in Nom.); J.I,390; Miln.396. (Page 47)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antaraṭṭhakahaka: {'def': '【中】冬天最寒冷的八天，（印度）下雪时。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】冬天最寒冷的八天，(印度)下雪时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antarika: {'def': '【形】中间物，下一个。antarikā,【阴】间隔，空隙。aṅgulantarikā, 手指的间隔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】中间物，下一个。 antarikā, 【阴】间隔，空隙。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. antara] “being in between”, i. e. ‹-› 1. intermediate, next, following: see an°. -- 2. distant, lying in between PvA.173 (aneka-yojan° ṭhāna). See also f. antarikā. -- 3. inside: see antarikā. --anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin.II,165, 212 (ān°); IV,234. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antarikā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. antarika] “what lies in between or near”, i. e. -- 1. the inside of Vin.IV,272 (bhājan°). ‹-› 2. the neighbourhood, region of (-°), sphere, compass Vin.III,39 (ur°, aṅgul°); J.I,265 (yakkhassa sīm° inside the yś sphere of influence). -- 3. interval, interstice Vin.II,116 (sutt° in lace); A.I,124 (vijj° the interval of lightning). (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antarā: {'def': '( antara‘中途’的【离】),【副】从中途，之间。antarāmagge, 在途中，在道路上。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】之间，其间。 ~magge, 在途中，在道路上。(p23)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Abl. or adv. formation fr. antara; Vedic antarā.] prep. (c. Gen. Acc. or Loc.), pref. (°-) and adv. “in between” (of space & time), midway, inside; during, meanwhile, between. On interpretation of term see DA.I,34 sq. -- (1). (prep.) c. Acc. (of the two points compared as termini; cp. B.Sk. antarā ca Divy 94 etc.) D.I,1 (antarā ca Rājagahaṁ antarā ca Nāḷandaṁ between R. and N.). -- c. Gen. & Loc. Vin.II,161 (satthīnaṁ between the thighs, where id. p. at J.I,218 has antara-satthīsu); A.II,245 (satthīnaṁ. but v. l. satthimhi). -- (2) (adv.) meanwhile Sn.291, 694; It.85; Dh.237. -- occasionally Miln.251. -- (3). (pref.) see cpds.

--kathā “in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conversation, D.II,1, 8, 9; S.I,79; IV,281; A.III,167; Sn.p. 115; DA.I,49 and freq. passim. --gacchati to come in between, to prevent J.VI,295. --parinibbāyin an Anāgāmin who passes away in the middle of his term of life in some particular heaven D.III,237; A.I,233; Pug.16. --magge (Loc.) on the road, on the way J.I,253; Miln.16; DhA.II,21; III,337; PvA.151, 258, 269, 273 (cp. antara°). --maraṇa premature death DhA.I,409; PvA.136. --muttaka one who is released in the meantime Vin.II,167. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antarāla: {'def': '【中】间隔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】间隔。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Antarāparinibbāyin: {'def': '(antarāparinibbāyī)(antarā从中途【副】+parinibbāyin遍涅盘),【形】从中途遍涅盘(他译：中般涅盘，指生至色界的寿命的一半即证得遍涅盘，并非指「於欲界死后尚未生至色界的中有之间，即已断灭五下分结而入般涅盘」。)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antarāpaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [antarā + paṇa “in between the shopping or trading”] place where the trading goes on, bazaar J.I,55; VI,52; Miln.1, 330; DhA.I,181. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】市场。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】市场。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antarāya: {'def': '² (adv.) [Dat. of antara or formation fr. antara + ger. of i?) in the meantime Sn.1120 (cp Nd² 58) = antarā SnA. 603. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】障碍，危险。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】障碍，险阻。Mv.I,112-3.︰Tatrime antarāyā-- (1)rājantarāyo, (2)corantarāyo, (3)agyantarāyo, (4)udakantarāyo, (5)manussantarāyo, (6)amanussantarāyo, (7)vāḷantarāyo, (8)sarīsapantarāyo, (9)jīvitantarāyo, (10)brahmacariyantarāyoti.(这些(十)障难︰(1)王难(国王常来光顾)、(2)贼难、(3)火难(火灾)、(4)水难(水灾)、(5)人难、(6)非人难、(7)野兽难、(8)爬虫类难(sarīsapa蛇、蠍等)、(9)命难、(10)梵行难(遭女人性骚扰)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [antara + aya from i, lit. “coming in between”] obstacle, hindrance, impediment to (-°); prevention, bar; danger, accident to (-). There are 10 dangers (to or from) enum^d. at Vin.I,112, 169 etc., viz. rāja°, cora°, aggi°, udaka°, manussa°, amanussa°, vāḷa°, siriṁsapa°, jīvita°, brahmacariya°. In B.Sk. 7 at Divy 544, viz. rājā-caura-manuṣy-amanuṣya-vyāḍ-agny-udakaṁ. -- D.I,3, 25, 26; A.III,243, 306; IV,320; Sn.691, 692; Dh.286 (= jīvit° DhA.III,431); J.I,62, 128; KhA 181; DhA II 52; VvA.1 = PvA.1 (hat° removing the obstacles) --antarāyaṁ karoti to keep away from, hinder, hold back, prevent, destroy Vin.I,15; J.VI,171; Vism.120; PvA.20.

--kara one who causes impediments or bars the way, an obstructor D.I,227; S.I,34; A.I,161; Pv IV.3²². (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antarāyika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. antarāya] causing an obstacle, forming an impediment Vin.I,94 = II.272; M.I,130; S.II,226; ThA.288. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】形成障碍物的。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】形成障碍物的。antarāyiko dhammo﹐障道法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antarāyikin: {'def': '(cp. Antarāyika), 【形】【中】有障难(one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties. Vin.IV,280 (anantarāye = asati antarāye无障难)。【阴】antarāyikinī。【阴】anantarāyikinī(无障难)。﹝问遮难﹞Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho. Ayañca Nāgo ayañca Nando āyasmato Tissassa upasampadāpekkhā. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ Nāgañca Nandañca antarāyike dhamme puccheyyaṁ.(尊者们，请僧团听我说，那迦和难陀希望从提舍大德受具足戒。如果对僧团而言时机适当，请让我审问那迦和难陀。)Suṇasi, Nāga, ayante saccakālo, bhūtakālo.(那迦你听著，这是你真实、诚实的时候。) “Yaṁ jātaṁ taṁ pucchāmi, santaṁ “atthī’ti vattabbaṁ, asantaṁ” n’atthī’ti vattabbaṁ.”(有已经发生的事情将会在僧团中问到。有则说「有」，没有则说「没有」。) Santi te evarūpā ābhādhā?”(你有这样的病吗？) “Ku??haṁ?”(麻疯？) “N’atthi, bhante.”(没有，尊者。) “Gaṇḍo?”(疔疮（溃烂）？) “N’atthi, bhante.”(没有，尊者。) “Kilāso?”(癣？) “N’atthi, bhante.”(没有，尊者。) “Soso?”(肺痨（肺结核）？) “N’atthi, bhante.”(没有，尊者。) “Apamāro?”(癫痫？w961m32！iunn5 hin5(羊眩)) “N’atthi, bhante.”(没有，尊者。) “Manusso’si?”(你是人吗？) “āma, bhante.”(是的，尊者。) “Puriso’si?”(你是男人吗？) “āma, bhante.”(是的，尊者。) “Bhujisso’si?”(你是自由人（非奴隶）吗？) “āma, bhante.”(是的，尊者。) “Anaṇo’si?”(你是否无债？) “āma, bhante.”(是的，尊者。) “N’asi rājabha?o?”(你是否免除了政府职责？) “āma, bhante.”(是的，尊者。) “Anuññāto’si mātāpitūhi?”(你是否获得父母亲的允许？) “āma, bhante.”(是的，尊者。) “Paripuṇṇavīsativasso’si?”(你是否满二十岁？) “āma, bhante.”(是的，尊者。) “Paripuṇṇaṁ te pattacīvaraṁ?”(你是否具备钵与衣(袈裟)？) “āma, bhante.”(是的，尊者。) “Kinnāmo’si?”(你叫什么名(字)？) “Ahaṁ, bhante, Nāgo nāma.(尊者，我的名（字）是那迦。) “Ko nāmo te upajjhāyo?”(你戒师的名（字）是什么？) “Upajjhāyo me, bhante, āyasmā Tissatthero(or Tissa) nāma.”(尊者，我戒师的名（字）是提舍长老。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [cp. antarāyika] one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties Vin.IV,280 (an° = asati antarāye). (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antarāḷa: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk antarāla] interior, interval Dāvs.I,52; III,53 (nabh°). (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antavant: {'def': '(ādj.) [anta¹ + °vant] having an end, finite D.I,22, 31, 187; Ps.I,151 sq.; 157; Dhs.1099, 1117, 1175; Miln.145. --anantavant endless, infinite A.V,193 (loka). See also loka. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antavantu: {'def': '【形】有结束的。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有结束的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antaḷikkha: {'def': '【中】天空。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】天空。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antepura: {'def': '【中】1.内城镇。2.闺房。antepurika,【形】闺房的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 内城镇。 2. 闺房。 antepurika, 【形】属于闺房的。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Antevāsika: {'def': 'antevāsin(ante内+vas住+in),【阳】内住者，待在旁边的人，跟主人住在一起的人，随从，徒弟too5 te7。台语：司仔sai a2。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'antevāsī, 【阳】跟主人住在一起的人，随从，学生。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ante°: {'def': '(pref.) [Sk. antaḥ, with change of --aḥ to --e, instead of the usual --o, prob. through interpreting it as Loc. of anta] near, inside, within; only in foll. cpds.: °pura (nt.) “inner town”, the king’s palace, esp. its inner apartments, i. e. harem [Sk. antaḥpura, cp. also P. antopura] Vin.I,75, 269; A.V,81; J.II,125; IV,472; Miln.1; PvA.23, 81, 280; °purikā harem woman DhsA.403; °vāsika one who lives in, i. e. lodges or lives with his master or teacher, a pupil Vin.I,60; III,25; S.I,180; IV,136; J.I, 166; II,278; III,83, 463; PvA.12; VvA.138; °vāsin = °vāsika Vin.III,66; D.I,1, 45, 74, 78, 88, 108, 157; M.III,116; DA.I,36. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anti: {'def': '(indecl.) [Vedic anti = Lat ante, Gr. a]nti/, Goth. and; Ags. and-, Ger. ant-, ent-] adv. & prep. c. Gen.: opposite, near J.V,399 (tav’antiṁ āgatā, read as tav’anti-m-āgatā; C. santikaṁ), 400, 404; VI,565 (sāmikass’anti = antike C.). -- Cp. antika. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antika: {'def': '【形】(【合】)在末端，接近。【中】接近，邻居关系。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】（【合】）在末端，接近。【中】邻居关系。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) --1. [der fr. anti] near KhA 217; nt. neighbourhood Kh VIII,1. (odak°); J.VI,565 (antike Loc. = anti near). -- 2. [der fr. anta = Sk. antya] being at the end, final, finished, over S.I,130 (purisā etad-antikā, v. l. SS antiyā: men are (to me) at the end for that, i. e. men do not exist any more for me, for the purpose of begetting sons. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antima: {'def': '(anta终极+ma最),【形】最终极，最后，结局。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】最后，结局。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Cp. superl. of anta] last, final (used almost exclusively with ref. to the last & final reincarnation; thus in comb^n. with deha & sarīra, the last body) D.II,15; Dh.351; It.50 (antimaṁ dehaṁ dhāreti), 53 (id.); Vv 5¹²; Sn.478 (sarīraṁ antimaṁ dhāreti) 502; Miln.122, 148; VvA.106 (sarīr’antima-dhārin); Sdhp.278.

--dehadhara one who wears his last body It.101 (dhāra T, °dhara v. l.); VvA.163. --dhārin = prec. S.I,14, 53 (+ khīṇāsava); II,278; It.32, 40; Sn.471. --vatthu “the last thing”, i. e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin.I, 121, 135, 167, 320. --sarīra the last body; (adj.) having ones last rebirth S.I,210 (Buddho a°-sarīro); A.II,37; Sn.624; Dh.352, 400; DhA.IV,166 (= koṭiyaṁ ṭhito attabhāvo). (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Antimadeha: {'def': '(antima最终极+deha身),最后身。antimasārīra﹐最后身。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anto: {'def': '【无】内，里面，内部。 ~kucchi, 【阳】【阴】子宫。 ~gata,~gadha, 【形】包括，容纳。 ~gabbha, 【阳】内房间。 ~gāma,内村。 ~ghara, 【中】内房子。 ~jana, 【阳】家庭成员。 ~jāta,【形】生在房里，奴隶。 ~vassa, 【阳、中】雨季。 ~vuttha, 【形】存在内的。(p24)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】内，里面，内部。antokucchi,【阳】【阴】子宫。antogata, antogadha,【形】包括(台语︰pau kuat)，容纳。antogabbha,【阳】内房间。antogāma, 内村。antoghara,【中】内房子。antojana,【阳】家庭成员。antojāta,【形】内结，生在房里，奴隶。antovassa,【阳】【中】雨季。antovuttha,【形】存在内的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [Sk. antaḥ; Av antar∂ Lat. inter, Oir. etar between, Ohg. untar; Idg. *entar, compar. of *en (in) = inner, inside] prep. inside, either c. Acc. denoting direction = into, or c. Loc. denoting place where = in. As prefix (°-) in, within, inside, inner (see cpds.) (1.) prep. c. Acc. anto nivesanaṁ gata gone into the house J.I,158; anto jālaṁ pavisati go into the net DhA.III,175; anto gāmaṁ pavisati to go into the village DhA.II,273; anto nagaraṁ pavisati DhA.II,89; PvA.47. -- (2) c. Loc. anto gabbhe J.II,182; gāme DhA.II,52; gehe DhA.II,84; nadiyaṁ J.VI,278; nivesane J.II,323; vasse in the rainy season J.IV,242; vimānasmiṁ Pv.I,10¹; sattāhe inside of a week PvA.55. --koṭisanthāra “house of the Golden Pavement” J.IV,113. --gadha (°gata? Kern Toev.) in phrase °hetu, by inner reason or by reason of its intensity PvA.10; VvA.12. --jana “the inside people”, i. e. people belonging to the house, the family (= Lat. familia) D.III,61 (opp. to servants); A.I,152; J.VI,301; DA.I,300. --jāla the inside of the net, the net DhA.IV,41. --jālikata “in-netted”, gone into the net D.I,45; DA.I,127. --nijjhāna inner conflagration PvA.18. --nimugga altogether immersed D.I,75; A.III,26. --parisoka inner grief Ps.I,38. --pura = antepura J.I,262. --mano “turning ones mind inside”, thoughtful, melancholy Vin.III,19. --bhavika being inside Miln.95. --rukkhatā being among trees J.I,7. --vasati to inhabit, live within S.IV,136. --vaḷañjanaka (parijana) indoorpeople J.V,118. --vassa the rainy season (lit. the interval of the r. s.) VvA.66. --vihāra the inside of the V. DhA.I,50 (°âbhimukhī turning towards etc.), --samorodha barricading within Dhs.1157 (so read for anta°, cp. Dhs. trsl. 311). --soka inner grief Ps.I,38. (Page 48)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anto-: {'def': '﹐【字首】内。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antojāta: {'def': '【形】内结。「内结与外结」(antojaṭā bahijaṭā)指对於自物.他物(saka-parikkhāra-para-parikkhāresu )，或於自身.他身(saka-attabhāva-para- attabhāvesu)，或於内处与外处(ajjhattikāyatana-bāhirāyatanesu)生爱著。内处(ajjhattikāyatana)即眼.耳.鼻.舌.身.意。外处(bāhirāyatana)即色.声.香.味.触.法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Antonimugga: {'def': '(anto向内+nimugga向下潜【过分】),【过分】向内向下潜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anu: {'def': '¹ (indecl.) [Vedic anu, Av. anu; Gr. a]/nw to a]/na along, up; Av. ana, Goth. ana, Ohg. ana, Ags. on, Ger. an, Lat. an (in anhelare etc.)] prep. & pref. -- A. As prep. anu is only found occasionally, and here its old (vedic) function with Acc. is superseded by the Loc. ‹-› Traces of use w. Acc. may be seen in expressions of time like anu pañcāhaṁ by 5 days, i. e. after (every) 5 days (cp. ved. anu dyūn day by day); a. vassaṁ for one year or yearly; a. saṁvaccharaṁ id. -- (b) More freq. w. Loc. (= alongside, with, by) a. tīre by the bank S.IV,177; pathe by the way J v.302; pariveṇiyaṁ in every cell Vin.I,80; magge along the road J v.201; vāte with the wind J.II,382.

B. As pref.: (a) General character. anu is freq. as modifying (directional) element with well-defined meaning (“along”), as such also as 1^st component of pref.-cpds., e. g. anu + ā (anvā°), anu + pra (anuppa°), + pari, + vi, + saṁ. -- As base, i. e. 2^nd part of a pref.-cpd. it is rare and only found in combⁿ sam-anu°. The prefix saṁ is its nearest relation as modifying pref. The opp. of anu is paṭi and both are often found in one cpd. (cp. °loma, °vāta). (b) Meanings. I. With verbs of motion: “along towards”. -- (a) the motion viewed from the front backward = after, behind; esp. with verbs denoting to go, follow etc. E. g. °aya going after, connexion; °āgacch° follow, °kkamati follow, °dhāvati run after, °patta received, °parivattati move about after, °bandhati run after, °bala rear-guard, °bhāsati speak after, repeat, °vāda speaking after, blame, °vicarati roam about °viloketi look round after (survey), °saṁcarati proceed around etc. -- (b) the motion viewed from the back forward = for, towards an aim, on to, over to, forward. Esp. in double pref.-cpds. (esp. with °ppa°), e. g. anu-ādisati design for, dedicate °kaṅkhin longing for, °cintana care for, °tiṭṭhati look after, °padinna given over to, °pavecchati hand over, °paviṭṭha entered into, °pasaṁkamati go up to, °rodati cry for, °socati mourn for. -- II. Witb verbs denoting a state or condition: (a) literal: along, at, to, combined with. Often resembling E. be- or Ger. be-, also Lat. ad- and con-. Thus often transitiving or simply emphatic. E. g. °kampā com-passion, °kiṇṇa be-set, °gaṇhāti take pity on, °gāyati be-singen, °jagghati laugh at, belaugh, °ddaya pity with, °masati touch at, °yuñjati order along, °yoga devotion to, °rakkhati be-guard, °litta be-smeared or an-ointed, °vitakheti reflect over, °sara con-sequential; etc. -- (b) applied: according to, in conformity with. E. g. °kūla being to will, °chavika befitting, °ñāta permitted, al-lowed, °mati con- sent, a-greement, °madati ap-preciate, °rūpa = con-form, °vattin acting according to, °ssavana by hearsay, °sāsati ad-vise, com-mand etc. -- III, (a) (fig.) following after = second to, secondary, supplementary, inferior, minor, after, smaller; e. g. °dhamma lesser morality, °pabbajā discipleship, °pavattaka ruling after, °bhāga after-share, °majjha mediocre, °yāgin assisting in sacrifice, °vyañjana smaller marks, etc.; cp. paṭi in same sense. -- (b) distributive (cp. A. a.) each, every, one by one, (one after one): °disā in each direction, °pañcāhaṁ every 5 days, °pubba one after the other. -- IV. As one of the contrasting (-comparative) prefixes (see remarks on ati & cp. ā³) anu often occurs in reduplicative cpds. after the style of khuddânukhuddaka “small and still smaller”, i. e. all sorts of small items or whatever is small or insignificant. More freq. comb^ns. are the foll.: (q. v. under each heading) padânupadaṁ, pubbânupubbaka, poṅkhânupoṅkhaṁ, buddhânubuddha, vādânuvāda, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi. -- V. As regards dialectical differences in meanings of prefixes, anu is freq. found in Pāli where the Sk. variant presents apa (for ava), abhi or ava. For P. anu = Sk. (Ved.) apa see anuddhasta; = Sk. abhi see anu-gijjhati, °brūheti, °sandahati; = Sk. ava see anu-kantati, °kassati², °kiṇṇa, °gāhati, °bujjhati °bodha, °lokin, °vajja.

Note (a) anu in comp^n. is always contracted to °ânu°, never elided like adhi = °dhi or abhi = °bhi. The rigid character of this rule accounts for forms isolated out of this sort of epds. (like mahânubhāva), like ānupubbikathā (fr. *pubbānupubba°), ānubhāva etc. We find ānu also in comb^n. with an- under the influence of metre. -- (b) the assimilation (contracted) form of anu before vowels is anv°. (Page 33)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(g)gaṇhāti [anu + gaṇhāti] to have pity on, to feel sorry for, to help, give protection D.I,53 (vācaṁ; cp. DA.I,160: sārato agaṇhaṇto); J.II,74; Nd² 50 (ppr. med. °gayhamāna = anukampamāna); Pug.36; PvA.181 (imper. anuggaṇha = anukampassu). pp. anuggahīta (q. v.). (Page 35)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) subtile; freq. spelling for aṇu, e. g. D.I,223 Sdhp.271, 346 (anuṁ thūlaṁ). See aṇu. (Page 34)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anu-: {'def': 'I.【字首】随，跟随，渐次，顺，从。II.【形】小的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anubaddha: {'def': '[pp. of anubandhati] following, standing behind (piṭṭhito) D.I,1, 226. (Page 39)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(anubandhati的【过分】), 已连接，已跟随。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Anubajjhati: {'def': 'at PvA.56 is faulty reading for anubandhati (q. v.). (Page 39)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Anubala: {'def': '【中】1.帮助，刺激。2.后卫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 帮助，刺激。 2. 后卫。(p19)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [anu + bala] rear-guard, retinue, suite, in °ṁ bhavati to accompany or follow somebody Miln.125. (Page 40)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】